仁爱版英语七年级下册教案全册


    



    教 案






    科目 英 语(七)

    姓名





    二〇九年学期

    Unit 5 Our School Life
    Topic 1 I usually come to school by subway
    Section A
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1(1) Learn some means of transportationby bike by subway by bus on foot by plane by car by train by ship by boat
    (2) Learn other new words and phrasesgate the same to come on go to school Ms grandmother group
    2 Learn adverbs of frequencyoften usually always
    3 Review the present simple tense—Do you often come to school by bike—Yes I doNo I don’t
    4 Talk about how to go to school
    —How do you usually come to school
    —I usually come to school by subwayI always come to school by bus
    法制教育:


    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机交通工具模型图片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复日常语呈现1a容
    1 (师生互相问 复学问候语)
    T Good morning everyone
    Ss Good morning madamsir
    T Welcome back to school boys and girls Happy New Year
    教师帮助学生回答)
    Ss Happy New Year
    T We can also say The same to you
    (然引入The same to you练强化)
    (板书)
    Happy New Year 新年
    The same to you 样(新年)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    学1a完成1b
    1 (事先准备模型教学图片简笔画学生展示bike导入课重点:交通方式图)
    2 (样方式教学交通工具板书相关词组)
    bike car foot subway
    bus ship boat plane train



    by bike by car on foot by subway by bus by ship by boat by plane by train
    (1)(熟读板书词组)
    (2)(面简笔画词组学生1b图片模仿例句造句:)
    Example:
    T I come to school by bus
    S1 I come to school by bike
    S2 I go to school on foot
    (完成1b板书go to school)
    go to school
    (3)(询问两名学生学交通方式 usually alwaysoften作换练 示范汇报结果)
    T I often come to school by bike Do you often come to school by bike
    S3 Yes I do
    T S4 do you usually come to school by bus
    S4 No I don’t I usually come to school on foot
    T …
    T Good S3 often comes to school by bike S4 usually comes to school on foot S5 always comes to school by bus … OK Work in groups of three to practice like that

    (板书画线部分)
    Do you often come to school by bike
    Yes I do No I don’t
    usually often always
    2 (呈现1a学交通方式提问)
    (1)(学生听1a录音 回答列问题)
    (板书)
    (1)Where do Kangkang Jane and Helen meet
    (2)How does Helen usually come to school
    (3)How does Jane always come to school
    T Now let’s listen to the tape and find out the answers to these questions Are you ready
    Ss Yes
    T OK let’s begin
    (播放录音)
    (2)(核答案 提取重点句型)
    T Who can answer the first question
    S1 I can They meet at the school gate
    T Well done What about the answer to Question 2
    S2 Helen usually comes to school by subway
    T Good Next question
    S3 Jane always comes to school by bus
    T Good job
    (问题2板书画线部分做相应讲解操练)
    (板书)
    Helen usually comes to school by subway
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固1a完成1c
    1 (播放1a录音读模仿语音语调)
    T Listen to the tape and follow it Pay attention to your pronunciation and intonation
    2 (机话学生录音机话提高学生兴趣)
    T Now suppose you are Helen and Jane Listen to the tape and make a dialog with Kangkang Are you clear
    3 (完成1c 学生三组 练1a话求仿1a伴编类似话)
    T Now boys and girls please practice 1a in groups of three and make similar dialogs with your partners Then I will ask some groups to act them out
    4 (选组表演成果)
    T Which group can act your dialog out
    G1 We can (表演话)
    T Wonderful Anyone else
    G2 We can (表演话)

    (学生表演进行点评适鼓励必时纠正学生话中存错误)
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    完成2a2b
    1 (学生2a中图片相应短语代码填入圆圈中)
    T Just now we talked about the means of transportation Now let’s look at the pictures in 2a Then match the pictures with the corresponding phrases Do you understand
    Ss Yes we do
    T Good Let’s begin
    2 (核答案)
    3 (学生听录音 完成2b掌握生词Msgrandmother)
    T Next we will have a listening practice Let’s find out how people come to school or come to work Do you understand
    Ss Yes we do
    (播放录音核答案)
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间15分钟)
    表达交通工具名词频度副词进行实践调查 完成3
    1 (媒体课件flash动画简笔画 学生展开想象 意造句子 求交通工具表达语频度副词)
    T Let’s look at the pictures I’m sure you are interested in these lovely pictures Please make sentences as you like and don’t forget to use these means of transportation and adverbs of frequency Are you ready Go
    2 (学生分组做关how to come to school调查报告完成3调查时强调How do you usually come to schoolI usually come to school…句型掌握生词group)
    T Please report your results to your classmates
    S1 In our group three students come to school by bike…
    S2 In our group …
    S3 …

    (学汇总完成3)
    法制教育:


    3 (家庭作业)
    (1)(学生社会做调查交通工具种交通工具种交通工具少什?根调查结果模仿3做表格)
    (2)(预Section B 注意中频度副词)
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    课学介词by表示通助(方式手段)时法:by car by plane by ship等
    表示交通方式介词inon:in a car on a bus等时交通工具前加限定词on foot意步行走foot前需限定词foot复数(建议:教师总结课练课补充)













    Unit 5 Our School Life
    Topic 1 I usually come to school by subway
    Section B
    Ⅰ Aims and demands 目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    weekday early bird catch walk ride park do (one’s) homework watch TV television
    2 (1)Go on learning adverbs of frequency
    seldom never sometimes
    (2)Review the present simple tense
    I always get up at about six o’clock
    Li Xiang often comes to school by bike
    3 Go on learning adverbs of frequency and means of transportation in different expressions
    (1) I seldom walk to school
    I never go to school by subway
    (2) —How does Maria go home
    —She sometimes goes home by subway She sometimes takes the subway home
    4 Encourage the students to be diligent
    The early bird catches the worm
    法制教育:

    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机图片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间8分钟)
    链式发问形式复交通方式表达语相关句型导出1a呈现学1b
    1 (链式发问竖排第学生问第二学生关交通方式问题 第二学生回答接着问第三学生……类推组2分钟时间
    问题How do you usually go to school Do you often go to school by buscar…)
    Example
    S1 How do you usually go to school
    S2 I usually go to school by bike How do you usually go to school
    S3 I usually go to school by bus Do you often go to school by car
    S4 Yes I doNo I don’t

    2 (根第1环节实际情况 老师总结导出话1a语言功目标 步渡做铺垫)
    T Good Now I know some of you come to school by bike and some come to school by bus… I often come to school on foot But sometimes I come to school by bike I never come to school by bus But my father always goes to work by subway He seldom goes to work by train
    3 (板书讲解频度副词)


    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间5分钟)
    呈现1a
    1 (通解学生起床时间 引出谚语The early bird catches the worm学生猜测句谚语意思)
    T OK boys and girls what time do you usually get up
    S1 I usually get up at half past six
    S2 …
    T Yes we should go to bed early and get up early As the saying goes The early bird catches the worm Who knows the meaning of this sentence
    (学生猜测教师板书加讲解教导学生学生活中应该勤奋努力)
    The early bird catches the worm
    2 (根1a信息 设置听力务 学生带着务听1a录音 提高兴趣降低难度)
    T Listen to 1a and find out the answers to these questions on the blackboard
    (板书问题生词)
    3 (学生听遍1a录音核答案)
    (Keys to the questions)
    (1)He gets up at about six o’clock
    (2)He usually goes to school on foot
    (3)No she doesn’t
    (4)Sally always takes a bus to school
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固1a1b容
    1 (放1a录音 学生读模仿语音语调)
    T Follow the tape and pay attention to your pronunciation and intonation Ready Go
    2 (机话提高学生兴趣)
    T OK Suppose you are Michael and Sally Listen to the tape and make a dialog with Helen
    3 (学生分角色表演1a组间进行赛)
    T Good Now let’s work in groups and act out 1a Then we’ll choose the best one
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间15分钟)
    呈现2a图片呈现义换完成2b3
    1 (1)(呈现2a图片 通师生互动 学生进步解巩固语言知识)
    T Look at the first picture How does Maria go home
    Ss She goes home by subway
    T Yes we can also say she takes the subway home
    (样通谈第234幅图句子)
    Li Xiang comes to school by bikeLi Xiang rides a bike to school
    We go to the park on footWe walk to the park
    They go to the zoo by busThey take a bus to the zoo
    (呈现义换加强交通工具表达方式灵活运总结板书)
    by subway — take the subway by bike — ride a bike
    on foot — walk by bus — take a bus
    by car — take a car by plane — fly
    (2)(学生听2a录音读)
    T Follow the tape and pay attention to the pronunciation
    (3)(引导学生纳总结1a2a中频度副词法进行操练)
    T Find out the sentences with the adverbs of frequency pay attention to their usage and then make sentences
    2 (学生完成2b)
    T Now talk about the pictures in 2a with your partner
    Example
    S1 How does Maria go home
    S2 She sometimes goes home by subwayShe sometimes takes the subway home
    3 (播放3录音 学生独立完成3核答案)
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动
    1 (利学频度副词进行实践活动)
    (1)(学生How often do you …句型调查伴邻学生 根调查结果 写段话 量频度副词)
    T Now look at the table Please survey your partners or your neighbors using How often do you… You should complete the table with adverbs of frequency At last write a short passage according to the form You can begin like this Li Ming sometimes goes shopping …
    (表格)
    Activity
    Name
    go shopping
    watch TV in the
    evening
    walk after supper
    get up early
    Li Ming
    sometimes
    seldom
    often
    always















    (2)(名学生汇报调查结果)
    法制教育:


    2 (家庭作业)
    (学生Section ASection B中学重点句型写篇五句话左右关出行方式短文学生果兴趣 课外收集中外谚语名名言培养学力建构力)
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    1 动词介词短语表达交通方式:
    He walks to school He goes to school on foot
    说He on foot to school介词短语作谓语
    2 频度副词never seldom sometimes often usually always等句中位置 般位行动词前 系动词助动词情态动词




    Unit 5 Our School Life
    Topic 1 I usually come to school by subway
    Section C
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 (1) Learn other words of frequency
    once twice
    (2) Learn other new words and phrases
    life American or few have lunch at school day have a rest play basketball football go swimming and so on ball more talk game listen to music read library must first week every
    2 Learn how to express frequency
    How often do you go to the library
    OnceTwiceThree times a weekVery oftenEvery daySeldom …
    3 Talk about the daily activities
    play soccer play basketball read books go swimming go fishing listen to music watch TV do one’s homework go to the park meet friends cook go to the zoo
    4 Learn about the differences of the school life between American students and Chinese students
    法制教育:


    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机图片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间7分钟)
    复交通方式表达语频度副词呈现1a
    1 (热身活动学生起唱Section B 4中Let’s chant全班学生边唱边双手节拍)
    T Please turn to page 4 and let’s chant Ready
    Ss Yes
    2 (检查家庭作业然请学朗读写短文)
    T Please show me your homework Then I will ask several students to read their passages
    T Who wants to read it out
    S1 …
    T Anyone else
    S2 …
    3 (方案:问答形式 复交通方式表达语求学生量采两种表达方式)
    Example
    T S3 how do you usually go to school
    S3 I usually walk to schoolI usually go to school on foot
    T How do you usually go to school S4
    S4 I usually ride my bike to schoolI usually go to school by bike
    T How does S4 usually go to school
    S5 HeShe usually goes to school by bikeHeShe usually rides hisher bike to school
    T …
    (方案二:学生组里进行链式话 复交通工具表达语)
    S6 How do you often go to school
    S7 I often walk to school What about you
    S8 I often take the subway to school How do you usually go to school
    S9 …
    4 (引导学生复学频度副词seldom often always sometimes never usually 引出课新词组how often两新频度副词once twice)
    T I always go to the library after school Mr Zhang doesn’t go to the library every day He goes there oncetwice a week
    (板书画线部分 学新词oncetwice)
    oncetwice a week
    T How often do you go to the library (学how often帮助学生回答)
    Ss …
    (板书画线部分 重点讲解how often法)
    how often
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    呈现学1a
    1 (谈学校生活开始导入1a呈现新单词短语关键词提示词义板书)
    T Boys and girls do you like our school life
    Ss Yes we do
    T Then do you know about the school life of American students
    Ss No we don’t
    T Today we will learn about it together OK
    Ss Yes
    T First look at the blackboard and let’s learn some new words and phrases
    (板书)
    school life American or few have lunch at school day eat out have a short rest be over in their free time play basketball soccer go swimming ball games
    2 (学生仔细阅读1a话然回答1b五问题)
    (1)Let the students read 1a carefully and then answer the questions in 1b
    (2)Check the answers
    (板书答案)
    1 They usually walk to school or take a yellow school bus
    2 At school
    3 At about 3 o’clock
    4 They often play basketball or soccer go swimming and so on
    5 Four times a year
    3 (播放1a录音学生读模仿语音语调)
    T Now let’s follow the tape and pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation
    4 (机话)
    T Suppose you are Michael Listen to the tape and make a dialog with the interviewer
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间13分钟)
    表演巩固1a完成1c
    1 (学生黑板呈现关键词两组表演1a)
    T OK Close your books Look at the key words on the blackboard and act 1a out with your partner
    2 (学生根1a1b写篇关美国学生学校生活文章完成1c)
    3 (谈中国学生学校生活根1b五问题展开)
    T Now let’s talk about the school life of Chinese students You can discuss it according to the questions in 1b
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    运图片练23
    1 (出示张Hai Qing踢球片学生介绍外三幅图片 引出新动词短语 板书)
    play soccer go swimming
    play basketball go fishing
    listen to music do his homework
    watch TV go to the park
    T I usually read books after school What do you usually do after school S1
    S1 I usually play soccer
    T Look at this picture What does Hai Qing usually do after school
    S1 He usually plays soccer but he doesn’t play basketball
    (采样方法继续操练完成2)
    2 (学生利2中图片运How often频度短语副词进行问答):
    T Look at the first picture How often does Hai Qing play soccer
    Ss Usually
    (样方法操练完成2然操练3中句型教学Work must come first libraryread)
    (板书)
    Work must come first
    library read
    3 (链式话方式 进行3容)
    T Now let’s use the words and phrases in the box of 3 and do a chain work like this
    Example
    S2 Do you often …
    S3 Yes I do No I don’t
    S2 How often do you …
    S3 OnceTwiceThree times a weekVery oftenEvery daySeldom … Do you often …
    S4 …

    (老师学生熟练操练完成总结how often法板书回答词短语)
    oncetwicethree times a week
    every dayweekmonth …
    neverseldomsometimesoftenusuallyalways
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间5分钟)
    进行采访 做调查报告 解中美学生学校生活差异
    1 (学生做调查报告 全班汇报)
    T Survey your classmates and fill out the form Then report it to the class
    Example
    A How often do you watch TV
    B Once a week

    Activity
    Name
    watch TV
    in the evening
    walk to
    school
    play computer
    games
    help
    your parents
    play
    basketball
    Li Ming
    once a week
















    You can report like this
    Li Ming watches TV in the evening once a week …
    2 (学生讨中美学生学校生活差异)
    (全班学生分成四组 讨中美学生学校生活差异 组名学生进行纳总结然组推荐出名记者 全班学生汇报 学生做记录)
    T The whole class talk about the differences in the school life between American students and Chinese students Then write them down and report to the class
    Example
    In America students walk or take a yellow school bus In China students…
    法制教育:



    3 (家庭作业)
    (1)(收集关美国学生学校生活相关信息记录)
    (2)(纳学频度副词短语)










    Unit 5 Our School Life
    Topic 1 I usually come to school by subway
    Section D
    Ⅰ Aims and demands 目标求
    1 Learn the vowels ( (
    2 Learn some new words and phrases
    begin have classes while go to bed
    3 Sum up the useful expressions in this topic
    (1)Happy New year The same to you
    (2)The early bird catches the worm
    (3)Nice talking to you
    (4)Work must come first
    (5)She goes to bed at about a quarter to ten
    4 Review and sum up the grammars
    (1) Review words and phrases of frequency
    never seldom sometimes often usually always oncetwicethree times a week
    (2) Sum up the present simple tense
    ①Do you often come to school by bike Yes I do No I don’t
    ②I usually come to school by subway
    ③I seldom walk to school
    ④I never go to school by subway
    ⑤They always take a bus to the zoo
    ⑥How does Maria go home She sometimes takes the subway home
    ⑦How often do they have ball games Four times a year
    ⑧He usually plays soccer but he doesn’t play basketball
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机音标卡片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间7分钟)
    复节日问候语谚语复Section C完成4b5
    1 (生日歌旋律唱Happy New Year导入课 活跃课堂气氛 步进行4b做准备)
    T Let’s sing the song Happy New Year together
    T & Ss Happy New Year to you
    Happy New Year to you
    Happy New Year The same to you
    Happy New Year to you
    2 (学4b 纳话题中表达方式)
    (1)(通面歌曲 巩固面表达方式)
    (板书)
    Happy New Year
    The same to you
    (2)(呈现The early bird catches the wormWork must come first翻译成汉语 勉励学生勤奋学)
    T In this topic we have learnt two useful expressions They tell us we must work hard and can’t waste our time Do you still remember them
    Ss Yes One is The early bird catches the worm and the other is Work must come first
    T So you must study hard every day
    (板书)
    The early bird catches the worm
    捷足先登早起鸟虫吃
    Work must come first
    工作第
    3 (学生听4b录音声读)
    T Well let’s listen to 4b Follow it loudly
    4 (检查家庭作业完成5)
    T Boys and girls have you finished your homework
    Ss …
    T Good In the last lesson we learnt about the school life of American students Today let’s survey your classmates about the school life Fill out the form in 5 with your survey results Then compare the school life of American students with yours and write a passage You may begin like this
    The school life of American students is different from ours… OK let’s begin
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间5分钟)
    呈现2
    1 (复般现时引出2)
    (学生图片完成书中表格)
    T Boys and girls Look at the pictures in the passage What does Jane usually do at 620 am
    Ss She usually gets up at 620 am
    T What does she do at half past seven
    Ss She goes to school

    (教师边问边引导学生完成部分表格)
    2 (学生听录音完成剩余表格)
    T Good Let’s listen to 2 and fill in the rest blanks Ready
    Ss Yes
    T OK let’s begin
    (播放2录音)
    3 (核答案)
    T Now let’s check the answers Who wants to share the answers with us
    S1 Let me try …
    T Very good Next one
    S2 …

    4 (学生仔细阅读2找新单词猜测词义)
    板书
    begin have classes while go to bed
    T Wonderful Now let’s read this passage carefully and guess the meaning of the words

    (点评纠正学生理解错误)
    5 (学生2中表格复述短文)
    T Now let’s look at the table and retell this passage Any volunteers
    S3 Let me try …
    T Great Anyone else

    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间16分钟)
    巩固2完成4a3
    1 (学生次阅读2快速找出含交通方式频率副词句子)
    T OK Now read 2 quickly again and underline the means of transportation and adverbs of frequency

    T Good Besides these sentences can you tell me other expressions about frequency and means of transportation
    (教师引导学生回答边说边黑板右方板书never seldom …)
    (板书)
    Frequency


    Means of transportation
    by car take a car
    by subway take the subway
    by bike ride a bike
    by bus take a bus
    on foot walk
    by plane fly
    (表引导学生朗读4a完成3)
    2 (学生听录音读4a)
    3 (学生听录音完成3)
    T Well let’s listen to 3 and fill in the blanks Ready
    Ss Yes
    T Let’s begin

    4 (核答案文中句子转换成种交通表达方式)
    T Now let’s check the answer
    Ss Miss Yang always goes to Wuhan by bus
    T Great You can also say Miss Yang always takes a bus to Wuhan
    (样引导学生进行2345句子换练)
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间7分钟)
    音标卡片学音标练音标完成1
    1 (全班学生持张卡片张卡片教学目标中列出两音标中学音标全班动员参)
    T Everyone has a card If I read ( please raise your card with ( and stand up If I read ( please raise your card with ( and stand up Do you understand
    2 (组活动名学生读卡片音标组成员均举起相应音标卡片)
    T Practice in groups One reads the phonetic symbols and others raise cards
    3 (学生听1录音读)
    T Listen to 1 and read after the tape
    4 (组单位进行赛限定时间组说出含(发音单词)
    T Boys and girls next we’ll have a competition Let’s work in groups and speak out words which have sound ( in given time as many as possible At last we’ll decide which group is the winner Do you understand
    Ss Yes
    T OK Let’s begin Be quick

    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    介绍日常生活 加强实践活动 提高英语应力
    1 (学生制作表格介绍天活动)
    T Make a form about your daily activities
    Example
    Time
    Activity
    630 am
    get up
    700 am

    730 am
    go to school
    1200 am

    after school

    after dinner

    2 (找名学生介绍活动)
    3 (家庭作业)
    学生写篇关日常活动短文求 (1)般现时(2)学频度副词
    (范文:)
    My Day
    I usually get up at 630 am I often go to school by bus at 730 am Classes begin at 800 am I have four classes in the morning
    I always have lunch at 1200 am I have two classes in the afternoon After school I sometimes play football with my classmates
    I get home at 530 pm and have dinner at 700 pm After dinner I often do my homework I seldom watch TV in the evening I go to bed at about 1000 pm I never go to bed late(迟晚)
    安排1节口语训练单词词组测
    1 always usuallyoftenneversometimes by bus on footby ship 等



    Unit 5 Our School Life
    Topic 2 A few students are running on the playground
    Section A
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1(1) Learn the names of school buildings
    playground gym dormitory lab computer room dining hall classroom building swimming pool
    (2) Learn other new words
    make card boring soon run dance sleep clean
    2 Learn the present continuous tense
    What are you doing now I’m making cards
    What is Maria doing now She is reading in the library
    Are you watching TV Yes I amNo I’m not
    Is Kangkang reading in the library Yes he isNo he isn’t
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机教学挂图幻灯片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间8分钟)
    复节课校园生活容 呈现活动3
    1 (学生描述校园生活 in one’s free time often twice a week go swimming read books play soccer …学校园活动场名称作铺垫 学现进行时提供必动词词组)
    T Today I want to make a survey S1 do you like our school life
    S1 Yes I like our school life very much
    T What do you usually do in your free time
    S1 I usually play soccer
    T Thank you S2 what do you usually do in your free time
    S2 I often read books
    T What about you S3
    S3 I often go swimming

    2 (询问学生通常里做述活动 呈现校园活动场名称)
    T I know you all have an interesting school life S1 usually plays soccer S2 often reads books S3 often goes swimming… Please answer my questions now Where do we play soccer If you can’t answer it in English you can speak Chinese
    Ss 操场
    T Where do we read books
    Ss 图书馆
    T Where do we swim
    Ss 游泳池

    (教师利幻灯片逐呈现校园活动场名称)
    T Now look at the first picture What’s this(教师出示第张幻灯片)
    Ss Playground
    T What’s this in English(出示第二张幻灯片)
    Ss Dormitory(教师帮助学生回答)

    (次引导出生词板书)
    (板书)
    playground library swimming pool lab computer room gym classroom building
    dormitory dining hall
    3 (学生3中词图片正确搭配)
    T Just now we learned some new words Now let’s look at the picture in 3 Then match the places with the right pictures
    4 (核答案)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间17分钟)
    呈现2a 1a 完成2b
    1 (猜猜老师做出读书动作 问What am I doing帮助学生回答You are reading a book例 学生轮流做动作 学生猜猜干什)
    Example
    T Now I am in the classroom Guess What am I doing (老师做出读书动作)
    Ss You are reading a book
    S1 I am on the playground What am I doing (学生做出踢球动作)
    S2 You are playing soccer
    T … What is S1 doing (老师指着S1 S1做出踢球动作)
    Ss … HeShe is playing soccer
    T What is S2S3 … doing
    Ss HeShe is …
    2(老师呈现2a中挂图 指着图片发问指导学生回答)
    T Where is Maria
    Ss She is in the library
    T What is she doing
    Ss She is reading
    (指着第二幅图继续发问)
    T Where is Kangkang

    (板书新句型求学生掌握dance sleep clean)
    — Where is Maria — What is she doing
    — She is in the library — She is reading
    (学生根1a 2a图练现进行时)
    T Where is Jane
    Ss She is at home
    T What is she doing
    Ss She is watching TV
    (学生间进行话)
    S1 …
    S2 …
    3 (学生听2a 完成2b)
    T Let’s listen to 2a again And finish 2b Begin
    4 (核答案)
    T Who wants to share your answers with us
    S7 Maria …
    S8 Kangkang …
    S9 Wang Wei …
    5 (听录音学1a)
    T From the pictures we can see they are making a phone call What are they talking about Now let’s listen to it
    (听1a录音)
    T Is Jane doing her homework
    Ss No she isn’t
    T Is Jane watching TV
    Ss Yes she is
    (通话方式引导学生掌握现进行时般疑问句肯定否定回答形式时学生词)
    (板书)
    Is she doing her homework
    Yes she isNo she isn’t


    make card soon
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固1a 2a
    1 (放1a 2a录音 学生读 注意语音语调)
    T Please listen to the tape and follow it Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation
    (播放录音)
    2 (机话)
    T Now listen to me carefully Suppose you are Jane Listen to the tape and make a dialog with Michael
    3 (学生分角色朗读话)
    T Very good Work in groups and read the dialog in roles I will ask several groups to act it out Begin
    4 (老师总结现进行时法构成)
    (板书)
    +be(amisare)+ving+
    (老师纳ving构成)
    (板书)
    ving构成三种:
    1直接词尾加ingplaying doing
    2发音字母e结尾动词 掉字母e加ingmaking dancing
    3重读闭音节结尾末尾辅音字母 双写辅音字母 加ingrunning swimming
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    练1a 2a完成1b4
    1 (设置场境引导学生组单位表演话评出佳表演者)
    T Now let’s put 1a and 2a together then act it out Ready OK another 3 minutes to prepare

    T OK Let’s begin Who want to have a try
    G1 …
    T Very good Anyone else
    G2 …
    (评出佳组佳表演者予相应表扬鼓励)
    2 (两组根1a利What are you doing I’m …Are you … Yes …No …编类似话完成1b)
    3 (学生根4图画进行两话)
    T Please look at the picture ① in 4 Ask and answer questions in pairs
    S1 Where is she
    S2 She is in the gym
    S1 Is she singing
    S2 No she isn’t
    S1 What’s she doing
    S2 She’s dancing
    (样方法操练外三幅图学生掌握生词run)
    4 (学生组单位利1b4合编成话表演)
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间5分钟)
    通表演猜测 培养学生实际运力
    1 (请名学生台做动作 学生现进行时态进行问答)
    T×× please come here
    (出示dance动作卡片)
    Please perform the action
    (学生表演跳舞动作)
    T What is heshe doing
    Ss He’sShe’s dancing

    2 (家庭作业)
    (求学回家时间观察家中成员做什做记录)
    T I’d like you to watch your family after you go back home Please write down what heshe is doing










    Unit 5 Our School Life
    Topic 2 A few students are running on the playground
    Section B
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    borrow a few of course use look for shelf keep return on time pleasure post byebye another Lost and Found purse money else picture put on
    2 Go on learning the present continuous tense
    Many students are using them and they are doing better in English now
    I’m looking for my purse
    3 Learn how to borrow things
    Excuse me may I borrow a few Ren’ai Project English workbooks
    How long can I keep them
    You must return them on time
    4 Learn how to write Lost and Found
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机课件挂图图片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复学校场 呈现1a
    1 (方案猜谜说描述性语言 学生猜学校场)
    T Boys and girls guess the place First a place where we can go swimming What is it
    S1 Is it the swimming pool
    T Yes you are right Next a place where we can do some sports What is it Who knows
    S2 Playground

    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间12分钟)
    呈现活动1a 练1b
    1 (继续话利课件图片呈现1a)
    T A place where there are many different kinds of books What is it
    S5 Library
    T Good What can we do in the library(教师出示图书馆图片)
    S6 Read books
    T Anything else
    S7 Borrow books(帮助学生回答问题引导出生词borrow)
    T Great What should we say when we borrow books
    S8 …

    (次引导出生词短语句型keep a few How long … 板书讲解)
    (板书)
    borrow keep return use shelf
    a few of course look for on time
    How long can I keep them Two weeks
    2 (学生听1a第1部分 注意话中生词句型)
    T Look and listen to dialog 1 in 1a Pay attention to the new words and expressions on the blackboard
    3 (假设种情境学生没想书 该办?)
    (方案利课件呈现1a第2部分容求学生掌握post)
    T Boys and girls if you can’t borrow the book you want what should you do
    Ss I don’t know
    T OK Let’s go on watching and pay attention to what they say
    (播放课件)
    (方案二老师学生做示范 帮助学生回答 呈现1a第2部分容求学生掌握post)
    T Boys and girls if you can’t borrow the book you want what should the librarian say
    Ss HeShe should say Sorry we don’t have any(帮助学生回答)
    T What should you say
    Ss Thank you all the same(帮助学生回答)
    (板书)
    post
    Sorry we don’t have any
    Thank you all the same
    Byebye
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    巩固1a 根1b中句型编话
    1 (学生合课听录音读1a注意语音语调)
    T Now please close your books Listen to the tape and follow it Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation
    2 (学生分成两部分部分表演1a话1部分学表演1a话2两
    组进行练)
    T Now I will divide you into two groups One group acts out Dialog 1 in 1a and the other group acts out Dialog 2 in 1a Work in pairs Do you understand
    Ss Yes
    T Now let’s begin
    3 (分找组学生进行表演组学演)
    T OK I want to know which group can act it out best Are you ready
    Ss Yes we are
    T Which group wants to act first
    G1 We want

    T Very good But you can speak slowly next time OK Next group
    G2 …

    3 (学生1a中找出1b相应答语1b中句型编话 教师予必指导)
    T Now please find out the responses to the sentences in 1b from 1a and work in pairs to practice borrowing things from others You can use the expressions in 1b Begin
    4 (找组学生表演编话)
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    利情景设置呈现2a 练2b3
    1 (设置名女学生路寻找东西情景 呈现2a)
    T Look at the picture Guess what she is doing
    Ss She is looking for something (帮助学生回答)
    (采话次引导出生词句型)
    (板书)
    talk money I’m looking for my purse
    Lost and Found else What’s in it
    purse picture What else
    2 (播放2a录音 学生读注意语音语调)
    T Listen to 2a and follow it Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation
    3 (学生两分钟时间 两组读话 然找学生朗读)
    T Now I’ll give you two minutes to read the dialog with your partners Then I’ll ask some of you to read it OK Begin
    4 (1)(学生读2b中两启事 学写寻物招领启事完成2b 提醒学生注意寻物招领启事格式容素)
    (板书)
    Lost The thing(丢失物品)
    Name(失)
    Phone number(联系方式)

    Found The thing(发现物品)
    Where(物品现存)
    Phone number(联系方式)
    T Read the notices on the bulletin board Learn how to write them Please pay attention to the format and content of the message and finish 2b
    (2)(学生写份寻物招领启事)
    T Suppose you found or lost something write your own bulletin board message
    5 (学生听录音完成3选择正确答案)
    (板书学听力部分生词)
    T Listen to the dialogs in 3 and choose the right answers First let’s learn some new words
    (板书)
    put on
    (播放录音)
    6 (核答案)
    T Let’s check the answers Who wants to answer the first question
    S1 Sally is…
    T Good No2 S2 please
    S2 Sorry I don’t know

    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间8分钟)
    通组活动探究东西程练写寻物招领启事
    1 (两组活动仿1a根1b中句型编话)
    T Work with your partners and make a conversation Similar to 1a You may use the expressions in 1b
    Examples
    (1)S1 Excuse me may I borrow a pen
    S2 Here you are
    S1 Great How long can I keep it
    S2 …
    (2)S3 Excuse me may I borrow a knife
    S4 Sorry I don’t have any
    S3 Thank you all the same Bye
    S4 Byebye
    2 (鼓励更学生复述2a容)
    T S5 do you want to retell the story of 2a?
    S5 …
    T Anyone else Raise your hand Wow so many
    3 (写寻物招领启事少两句子)(范文)
    Found
    A key to a bike
    Please call the Lost and Found
    Tel 8217667
    Lost
    My red umbrella
    My name is Mary
    Please call 8838752





    4 (家庭作业)
    (预13页1a兴趣模仿1a描述学校某建筑物某场景中行)
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    (1)look forfind法:
    look for意思寻找 强调找动作find物动词 意思找 发现 强调找结果 宾语:
    I can’t find my purse 找钱包
    Please look for it in your bag I think you can find it 请包里找 想找
    (2)otherelse区:
    other修饰名词位名词前:
    What’s that in your other hand 手里什?
    else修饰定代词疑问代词疑问副词必须位词:
    I have nothing else to say 没说
    What else do I need to do 做什事情?



    Unit 5 Our School Life
    Topic 2 A few students are running on the playground
    Section C
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn other new words and phrases
    show sb around sit write at the back of draw
    2 Review the present continuous tense
    What isare… doing
    IsAre…
    The boy is drawing pictures
    He isn’t making cards
    3 Review the names of school buildings
    4 Talk about everyday activities Encourage the students to take part in various kinds of activities actively
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机挂图图片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    通表演竞赛复引入1a
    1 (表演竞赛学生进行话表演 教师全班分四组 组表演话话时间分钟限第组学生东西 教室走动第二组东西丢 失物招领处找回第三组图书馆书图书馆没第四组请名学生表演动作 两名学生现进行时话通活动热身 提起学生学兴趣 复现进行时节课话)
    Group 1
    S1 Excuse me may I borrow…
    S2 Of course

    Group 2
    S3 What are you doing
    S4 I’m looking for my purse
    S5 …

    Group 3
    S6 Excuse me do you have any books of Harry Potter
    S7 Sorry I don’t have any
    S8 …

    T OK wonderful … the last group

    2 (出示Section A3挂图通复校园建筑物名称导入新课1a)
    T Please look at the picture Let’s go on talking about the names of school buildings OK
    (教师指着建筑物学生说)
    Ss Yes It’s a libraryplaygroundlab…
    T Now Peter is showing his mother around his school
    (板书讲解)
    show sb around … 带领某参观某
    T Look at the pictures in 1a Which of the places are they visiting
    Ss Playground gym and classroom
    T Great
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    呈现1a完成1b
    1 (学生边听录音边划出1a中be+ving结构)
    T Now listen to the passage and underline the structure be+ving
    2 (学生认真阅读1a呈现新单词词组完成1b)
    (1)T Please read the passage carefully guess the meaning of the new words and phrases and then finish 1b
    (板书生词词组猜词义熟读)
    sit—sitting on the playground have a soccer game
    write—writing in the gym write a letter
    draw—drawing in the classroom at the back of
    (2)(核答案)
    T Let’s check the answers of Part A in 1b Who can do it
    S1 …
    (3)T Write down your answers to Part B after the example
    (板书be+ving划线)
    Example
    Some students are having a soccer game
    S2 A few students are running
    S3 The girls are dancing
    S4 Three students are swimming
    S5 Kangkang is reading Ran’ai English Post
    S6 Sally is cleaning the blackboard
    3 (复分词构成规)
    T Now let’s review the formation rules of ving
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    巩固1a
    1 (放1a录音学生读注意语音语调)
    T Please listen to the tape and follow it Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation
    (播放录音)
    2 (学生朗读课文熟记)
    T Please read the text loudly and try to remember it
    3 (学生分成三组组背诵段话)
    T I’ll divide you into three groups Group 1 recite Passage 1 Group 2 recite Passage 2 Group 3 recite Passage 3 Be quick
    4 (组抽12名学背诵谁背快)
    T Are you ready Ss Yes
    T Now I’ll ask one or two students from each group to recite the passage Let’s see who can do it best
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    运图片练2
    1 (出示张男孩画画图片操练现进行时种句型)
    Example
    T Please look at the picture boys and girls Let’s talk about it Is the boy writing
    S1 No he isn’t
    T Is the boy making cardsS2 No he isn’t
    He is drawing He isn’t making cards
    T What is he doingS3 He is drawing
    T Yes He is drawing He isn’t making cards
    (板书)
    2 (学生两组仿例子练2外五幅图)
    T Work in pairs and practice the other five pictures according to the example Be quick
    3 (请五组学生分表演五幅图话练现进行时态填空)
    T Now I’ll ask five groups to act out the dialogs about the five pictures Who wants to act out your dialog
    G1 …T Very good Next who canG2 …

    4 (核答案)
    T Who wants to share your answers with us
    1 is doing 2are eating 3am listening
    isn’t writing aren’t drinking am not singing
    4 isn’t watching 5aren’t playing
    is playing are having
    S4 …
    S5 …

    (板书答案)
    法制教育:
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    调查班学课堂活动加强实践训练提高英语应力
    1 (学生活动2分钟观察周围学行现进行时写段少5句话短文)
    T Now please do what you like to do for two minutes and then watch your classmates around you Write a short passage with the present continue tense at least five sentences
    2 (找名学生汇报成果)
    T Well done Anyone else
    S2 ……
    T Great Remember you should use the present continuous tense
    (范文)
    It is 930 now In our classroom you can see Li Lei is writing Mary is drawing Jane and Li Wei are reading English Kangkang is talking with Michael How happy they are
    3 (班级活动学生完成3边放录音边唱优美歌声中结束节课)
    T Boys and girls let’s listen to a beautiful song Follow it please
    Unit 5 Our School Life
    Topic 2 A few students are running on the playground
    Section D
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn the vowels e等
    2 Learn some new words
    because Japanese wonderful also
    3 Review the present continuous tense
    I’m looking for my purse
    But they aren’t sleeping at the moment
    Are you doing your homework Yes I am No I’m not
    Is heshe singing Yes heshe is No heshe isn’t
    What are you doing I’m making cards
    What is heshe doing HeShe is playing soccer on the playground
    4 Review the names of school buildings
    5 Review how to borrow things from others
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机单词卡片音标卡片图片片挂图
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案

    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复表示校园建筑名称单词东西话
    1 (单词竞赛抽查三排学生 抽排 左右 名学生说出校园建筑名称单词 然现进行时态造句子单词5分 句子10分全班学生起找错误 找错误减两分 排分高)
    Example
    T Please give the names of school buildings and make sentences using the names one by one
    S1 Library I’m reading in the library
    S2 Playground I’m running on the playground
    S3 The swimming pool He’s swimming in the swimming pool

    (通竞赛 集中学生注意力 活跃课堂气氛 调动学生学积极性)
    2 (话赛学生复东西相关句型进行1分钟话表演两组组编快)
    T Boys and girls next we’ll have a conversation competition Let’s make dialogues bout how to borrow things from others and then act it out within one minute Please use the sentences we have learn as many as possible Work in pairs At last we’ll decide which group is the winner Let’s begin

    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    呈现1完成2
    1
    T Now please look at the card Can you read this word
    SsFarmer
    T How about this one
    Ss Guitar
    T Very good What about this one
    SsPark
    T Wonderful
    (板书park farmer guitar画出ar帮助学生找规律)

    (样方法次呈现音标板书:(板书)
    park farmer guitar ((
    hair pair chair ((
    walk ball call autumn August daughter ((
    waiter train rain gray May playground e(
    2 (放1录音 学生读)
    T OK please open your books and look at 1 in page 15 Let’s listen to the tape and follow it
    (播放录音)
    3 (学生读1 巩固学音标)
    T Read these phonetic symbols by yourselves
    4 (运头脑风暴法求学生说出发音单词)
    5 (教师出示2中图片出张文伟体育馆跑步片)
    T Look at this picture He is Wen Wei Is he dancing
    Ss No he isn’t
    T What’s he doing
    Ss He is running
    T Right He is running in the gym He isn’t dancing
    (样方法呈现外两张片进行操练)
    6 (学生2中图 听录音 板书新单词然学生填写列空格)
    T Look at the pictures in 2 Listen to the tape and then fill in the blanks on the blackboard First let’s look at the new words
    (板书)
    because Japanese
    wonderful also

    1)Wen Wei is in the gym in Picture 1
    2)In Picture 2 he is swimming in the
    3)In Picture 3 he is talking to on the Great Wall
    7 (核答案 找三名学生黑板填写空格)
    T Are you ready
    Ss OK
    T Who wants to fill in the blanks
    S1 …(黑板填写第题)
    T Is he right or wrong
    Ss Right
    T Very good Go back to your seat Next one
    S2 …(黑板填写第二题)

    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    巩固2
    1 (学生阅读短文完成2)
    T Please read the passage carefully underline the activities and circle the places Then number the photos OK
    Ss Yes
    2 (核答案)
    T Are you ready
    Ss Yes
    T Good Who wants to underline the activities
    S1 …
    T Good job Next who can circle the places
    S2 …

    3 (放遍2录音 根2中容 进行问答)
    T Ask and answer questions in pairs according to 2
    Example
    S3 Where is Wen Wei in Picture 1
    S4 He is…
    S3 What is he doing
    S4 He is…
    4 (找组学生汇报练结果)
    T I want someone to act out your dialog Who can do it
    G1 Where is…

    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    练3 完成4a 4b
    1 (呈现3 放录音 学生填写表格)
    T Now let’s do 3 First please listen to the tape carefully and then complete the table OK let’s begin
    (播放录音)
    2 (核答案)
    T OK let’s listen again and check your answers Are you ready
    Ss Yes
    (次播放录音)
    T Let’s check the answers The first one Jane Who can do it
    S1 Jane is playing the guitar in the dormitory
    T Is heshe right or wrong
    Ss Right
    T Good Next oneMaria?
    S2 Maria is dancing in the gym

    3 (完成4a 4b容 总结纳话题语法重点惯语)
    T Look at 4a 4b please They are very important to you You should read them carefully and try to remember them Understand
    (学生阅读 教师巡视 予必帮助)
    T OK Stop please Let me sum up the grammar for you Please look at the blackboard
    (板书)
    (1)+be(isamare)+doing …
    (2)Be(IsAmAre)++doing …
    (3)+be(isamare)+not+doing …
    (4)疑问词+be (isamare)+语+doing …
    法制教育:



    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通实践活动 培养学生细心观察事物力完成5
    1 (组赛学生两分钟分组讨找出5中两幅图处找出点正确组获胜教师予表扬)
    T Now let’s have a competition Work in groups of four to find out the differences between the two pictures in 5
    2 (根组活动讨结果写篇短文)
    T Write a passage according to the results of your discussion
    You may begin like this
    Three boys are swimming in Picture 1 but …
    3 (家庭作业)
    请学做课外活动调查学某时刻什方干什根调查结果写篇短文少6句话
    范文:
    It’s 440 in the afternoon now Look Some students are playing basketball on the playground A few students are running there too Mary is singing in the classroom Some boys are swimming in the swimming pool Some girls are dancing in the gym How happy they are













    Unit 5 Our School Life
    Topic 3 My school life is very interesting
    Section A
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 (1)Learn days of the week
    Wednesday Monday Tuesday Thursday Friday
    (2)Learn subjects
    physics geography P E art math science history biology politics
    (3)Learn other new words and phrases
    today meeting outdoor activity lesson learn
    2 Learn Whquestions
    What day is it today
    What time does the class begin
    3 Talk about subjects and timetables
    What class are they having
    They are having a music class
    What time is it over At a quarter to eleven
    How many lessons does he have every weekday
    What lessons does he have on Wednesdays
    How often does he do outdoor activities
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机图片黑板单词卡片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    通复 导入1a
    1 (师生说唱 复现进行时)
    T Let’s chantWhat are you doing
    What are you doing now
    I’m singing now
    What are you doing now
    I’m dancing now
    What are you doing now
    I’m walking now
    What are you doing now
    I’m playing now
    (边唱 边做动作 全班学生着唱 起做动作 活跃课堂气氛 激发学生学兴趣)
    2 (通师生问答 导入1a)
    T What are you doing now
    Ss We are singing a chant
    T What are we doing now We can say We are having a class now What class are we having
    Ss We are having an English class(老师帮助学生回答)
    T Do we have an English class every day
    Ss Yes we do
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间15分钟)
    呈现1a
    1 (老师呈现表示星期学科单词卡片幻灯片进行问答练学新单词)
    T What day is it today (举着星期二卡片)
    Ss It’s Tuesday(帮助学生回答)
    T Do you have a P E class on Tuesday
    Ss No we don’t

    T What time does the class begin
    Ss At eight o’clock
    T What time is it over
    Ss At a quarter to nine
    (学生两组利板书画线句型编话)
    T Work in pairs and make a dialog
    Example
    S1 What day is it today
    S2 It’s Tuesday
    S1 Do you have an English class on Tuesday
    S2 …
    (板书)
    It is Monday physics
    Tuesday geography
    Wednesday P E
    Thursday art
    Friday math
    history
    biology
    politics
    science
    2 (学生听1a录音回答黑板问题)
    T Listen to 1a carefully and find out the answers to these questions
    (板书)
    (1) What day is it today
    (2) What time does the class begin
    (3) What time is it over
    (播放录音)
    3 (核答案)
    T OK Are you ready
    Ss Yes
    T Let’s check the answers The first question who can answer it
    S3 It is Wednesday
    T Yeah very good The second one
    S4 At ten o’clock
    T Good job What about the third one
    S5 At a quarter to eleven
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固1a 完成1b
    1 (学生听1a读标出语音语调)
    T Listen to 1a follow it and mark the pronunciation and intonation
    2 (朗读1a核语音语调)
    T Read 1a loudly and check the pronunciation and intonation
    3 (学生背诵1a)
    T Now please recite 1a Are you ready
    Ss Yes
    4 (学生图片信息 完成1b)
    T Look at the pictures and information in 1b and practice the dialog with your partner
    Example
    S1 What day is it today
    S2 It’s …
    S1 What class are they having
    S2 They’re …
    S1 What time does the class begin
    S2 At …
    S1 What time is the class over
    S2 At …
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    复关科目星期单词练现进行时态完成2a3
    1 (老师2a中课程表贴黑板呈现幻灯片)
    T What’s this Do you know
    Ss 课程表
    T You’re clever It’s a timetable Do you know how to read the timetable
    Ss Yes
    T OK Read this timetable carefully and then answer the questions in 2a Begin
    (板书教生词)
    timetable class meeting
    outdoor activity lesson
    2 (核答案 困难学生予指导)
    T OK Are you ready now
    Ss Yes
    T Good Who wants to share the answers with us The first question
    S3 He has six lessons every day
    T Well done The second one
    S4 He has five English lessons every week
    T Right The third one
    S5 …

    T Any questions
    S6 …

    3 (取出黑板 呈现科目表格 练询问科目课时间句型)
    Subject
    Time
    (begin—finish)
    Day
    English
    750—835
    every day
    Math
    845—930
    every day
    Geography
    950—1035
    Monday
    History
    1045—1130
    Tuesday
    Biology
    1400—1445
    Wednesday
    Art
    1455—1540
    Thursday
    P E
    1550—1635
    Friday
    T Look at the blackboardslide and answer my questions Do you have a math class every day
    Ss Yes we do
    T What time does the class begin
    Ss At…
    T What time is the class over
    Ss At…
    (方案学生两分钟时间练话名学生问 名学生答 然交换角色)
    T Now I’ll give you two minutes to practice the dialog One asks the other answers and then exchange the roles
    (方案二学生3分钟分组活动练话 进行表演 评出优秀组)
    T Now I’ll give you three minutes to practice and act out the dialogs
    (找学生表演话)
    T Are you ready
    Ss Yes
    T Who wants to act out your dialog
    G1 We want
    S1 What’s your favorite subject
    S2 My favorite subject is art
    S1 Do you have an art class every day
    S2 No we don’t
    S1 What day do you have an art class
    S2 On Thursday
    S1 …

    T That’s great Next group
    G2 …

    4 (猜猜动作单词卡片学生复关科目星期单词完成3)
    (1)T Now look at me and guess what class I am having
    (做出唱歌跳舞动作)
    Ss You are having a music class
    T What day do you have a music class
    Ss On Wednesday
    (名学生做动作 外两名学生问答)
    Example
    S3 (做画画动作)
    S4 What class is he having
    S5 He is having an art class

    (板书)
    learn about work onout talk
    Using the expressions in the box to make some sentences
    (2)(练现进行时)
    T Now make similar conversations with the phrases in the box of 3 with your partner
    Example
    S1 They are learning about the past in the class What class are they having
    S2 They are having a history class
    法制教育:


    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通调查 探究学生科目喜
    1 (学生做调查 采访班学生 解周中天喜欢科目原)
    T Please interview your classmates and learn about their favorite subjects and reasons
    Time
    Favorite subject
    LikeDislike
    Reason
    Day
    800—900
    art
    like very much
    like drawing pictures
    Monday




    Tuesday




    Wednesday




    Thursday




    Friday
    2 (学生完成调查表格 调查结果汇报全班学生)
    T You can report it to the class like this
    On Monday my favorite subject is art It begins at eight and finishes at nine I like it very much because I like drawing pictures …
    3 (家庭作业)
    (1)(学生英语设计课程表完成2b)
    (2)(预Section B找出短语句子)
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    1 Sunday意星期日星期天英国做周天美国做周第天
    2 class指整课堂 包括老师讲授学生听讲 英语课美术课等
    lesson课文身 范围非常 :Lesson One第课


    Unit 5 Our School Life
    Topic 3 My school life is very interesting
    Section B
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 (1)Learn some adjectives
    easy interesting difficult
    (2)Learn other new words
    which subject best story
    2 Talk about interests likes and dislikes
    You must like English very much
    I don’t like it very much
    Which subject do you like best I like history best
    Why do you like it Because it’s easy and interesting
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机黑板单词卡片图片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间7分钟)
    1 (值日生汇报天学科目 复节课容)
    Example
    It’s Friday today We have Chinese English geography and art in the morning And in the afternoon we have P E and math…
    2 (师生互动 复节课容)
    T What day is it todaySs It is…
    T What class are we havingSs We’re having an English class
    T What time does the class begin boys
    Boys At…T What time is it over girlsGirls At…
    3 (检查家庭作业学生出制作英语课程表 五组讨列问题 复
    关科目星期特殊疑问句)
    T OK Very good Now take out your timetable look at it and ask and answer questions on the small blackboard in groups
    (取出黑板 呈现问题)
    (1)How many lessons do you have every week
    (2)How many EnglishChinese…lessons do you have every week
    (3)What time is the English class over
    (4)What is your favorite subject
    (5)How often do you do outdoor activities
    (请组学生方框中问题讲台进行链式问答 第名学生问 第二名学生答 第二名学生接着问 第三名学生答类推)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    1 (1)(老师出语文数学英语等学科书学生发问 帮助学生回答)
    (出示easy interesting difficultboring单词卡片)
    T Do you like English
    S1 Yes I do
    T Why
    S1 Because it’s easy and interesting(老师帮助回答)
    T Do you like math S2
    S2 No I don’t
    T Why
    S2 Because it’s difficult and boring(老师帮助回答)
    T Which subject do you like best S3
    S3 I like music best(老师帮助回答)
    T Why do you like it
    easy interesting difficult boring which subject best
    S3 Because it’s easy and interesting
    T What do you think of it S4
    S4 …
    (板书)
    (2)(领读教学单词)
    2 (2中图片挂黑板学生根2例子伴话)
    T Now boys and girls look at the pictures on the blackboard According to the pictures and the example in 2 make conversations with your partners
    Example
    S1 Which subject do you like best
    S2 I like history best
    S1 Why do you like it
    S2 Because it’s easy and interesting What do you think of it
    S1 I think it’s too difficult
    3 (学生表演组织话)
    T Now please act your conversations out Who can
    G1 We can

    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    (组活动 进行4)
    (1)(学生进行调查 填写表格 完成4)
    T Your pair works wonderfully Now let’s work in groups Make a survey about the subjects in your group and complete the table in 4 You can ask your classmates like this
    S3 Hi ×× What’s your favorite subjectWhich subject do you like best
    S4 Music I think it’s interesting
    S3 Do you like art
    S4 No I don’t
    S3 Why don’t you like it
    S4 Because I think it’s boring

    (教师学生练程中 巡视全班学生困难时 予指导帮助)
    (2)(学生汇报结果 教师予点评)
    T OK Stop here Who wants to share your results with us
    G2 We want ×× likes music best because it’s interesting

    T OK Good job G2 Anyone else
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    1 (呈现1a 设置板书听力务 学生带着务听录音)
    T Let’s learn 1a This is a dialog between Maria and Zhou Yan Now listen to the tape carefully and mark the following sentences True (T) or False (F)
    (板书)
    (1)Maria is listening to music
    (2)Maria thinks English is easy and interesting
    (3)Zhou Yan doesn’t like history She likes English
    (4)Zhou Yan thinks history is boring
    (5)Zhou Yan has two history lessons every week
    2 (核答案)
    T OK Stop here Are you readySs Yes
    T Good Look at the first sentence Is it true or false
    S1 It’s false Maria is reading a book
    T Great The second oneS2 It’s true
    T ……
    3 (放1a录音学生读注意语音语调)
    T Listen to 1a again and follow it and pay attention to your pronunciation and intonation
    4 (学生完成1b然伴练1a表演)
    T Please finish 1b Then I’ll give you several minutes to read 1a and then I’ll ask some of you to act it out Understand
    Ss YesT OK Let’s begin
    5 (核答案然学生表演)
    T Which group wants to be the firstG1 …
    T Very good But you should speak slowly Next groupG2 …
    6 (学生听3录音填空)
    T Next we’ll have a listening practice Listen to the tape carefully and then complete the table in 3 OK let’s begin
    (播放录音)
    7 (核答案)
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间8分钟)
    通活动 培养学生实际运英语力
    1 (先回答列问题然学生写封信笔友 介绍学校喜欢科目学情况原)
    (出示黑板)
    (1)How many lessons do you have every dayweek
    (2)What is your favorite subject Why
    (3)Who is your favorite teacher Why
    (4)What do you think of your school What about your school life
    2 (家庭作业)
    (1)(学生课查阅资料 解中美学校学科设置作息时间学校生活)
    (2)(学生预Section C)
    Unit 5 Our School Life
    Topic 3 My school life is very interesting
    Section C
    ⅠAims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    friendly other news attention between stamp world Saturday from…to… night place program
    2 (1)Review subjects and school activities
    I study English politics art history geography biology and some other subjects
    After school I often play basketball with my classmates It’s my favorite outdoor activity
    (2)Learn how to write news and posters
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机白纸卡片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间7分钟)
    通组活动复旧知识引入1a完成4
    1 (师生录音学4完成4)
    T Let’s listen to 4 and chant together
    2 (两组活动进行话复Section A and Section B)
    T Make conversations with your partners
    Example
    T What day is it today
    S1 …
    T What lessons do we have today
    S1 We have …
    T Which subject do you like bestWhat’s your favorite subject
    S1 I like…bestMy favorite subject is…
    T Why
    S1 Because … What do you think of it
    T I think it’s …
    3 (提出关学校生活问题 学1a做准备)
    T What subjects do you learn in the school What activities do you have at school Do you
    love your school life Is it interesting
    S2 …
    S3 …
    T Good Your school life is very interesting Now let’s look at Hu Bin’s school life
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间5分钟)
    呈现1a
    1 (学生快速阅读1a找出新单词完成1a面判断正误题)
    T Now read 1a quickly and mark True (T) or False (F) then check the answers
    2 (1)(呈现生词)
    (板书)
    friendly other news attention between stamp collection
    world Saturday from…to… night place program

    (1) What time do classes begin
    (2) What does Hu Bin think of math
    (3) After school what does he do
    (4) Does he like his school life a lot
    (2)(领读单词步学课文做准备)
    T Read after me
    3 (板书问题)
    (学生听1a录音回答问题)
    T Now listen to 1a and answer these questions on the blackboard
    (学生回答问题教师核答案)
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    巩固1a完成1b
    1 (教师学生完成1a时 板书关键词 者课前关键词写黑板)
    friendly interesting classes begin study favorite also difficult and boring after school
    play basketball in the swimming pool draw pictures school library
    (学生参黑板关键词复述1a)
    2 (学生独完成1b教师核答案)
    T Fill in the blanks in 1b according to 1a by yourselves And I will check the answers a few minutes later
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    练活动2完成3
    (学生读2中消息海报回答问题核答案进步解Hu Bin学校生活)
    (1)T We have learnt about Hu Bin’s school life Next please read the news and posters about Hu Bin’s interesting school life Then answer the following questions
    (板书)
    (1)When does the soccer game begin
    (2)Where can we see the stamps of the world
    (3)What movies can we watch
    T Now let’s check the answers Who wants to answer the first question
    S4 I want …

    (2)(学生读2中消息海报然完成面空格)
    T Read the news and posters again and then fill in the blanks
    (板书)
    News Poster
    Place
    Time
    Program a soccer game between
    Class 1 and Class 2

    Place
    Day Every Saturday
    Time 900 am—500 pm
    Program
    (3)(核答案)
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间13分钟)
    通活动 增强学生实际运力 激发学生学兴趣
    1 (假设种情境:星期六晚学校礼堂举行歌舞晚会请学生起制作海报)
    2 (学生组单位谈设计理想学校生活写封信笔友Hu Bin介绍关学校生活完成3)
    3 (玩单词游戏 复巩固单词词组)
    (1)(事先准备足量统卡片 供活动中输家赢家转移财产时)
    (2)(选名学生 五张卡片 五张然告诉说出词反义词)
    T Now let’s play this game
    Example
    T Interesting What’s the opposite (反义词什?)
    S1 Boring
    (教师手中出张卡片递该学生 表明输掉张)
    T Easy What’s the opposite
    S1 Difficult
    T …
    (量说较容易词 便手中卡片输方期间赢两次然名学生说I have no cards now You can play with others)
    (3)(活动说明:先发名学生五张卡片然宣布两组愿组合①义词反义词相互提问②单元词词组中英文互相提问③句子英汉互译 次胜者方索取张卡片五张卡片输掉者退出活动 胜者继续寻找活动伙伴)
    (4)(统计学生拥卡片数量 谁卡片 教师全班学掌声鼓励)
    4 (家庭作业)
    (1)(学生单元单词类 准备节课单词竞赛)
    (①星期星期日②学科目③话题形容词④话题名词⑤话题动词)
    (2)(布置分钟话 桌两名学生编话 单元Section D 3a 3b中句型 备节课竞赛)

















    Unit 5 Our School Life
    Topic 3 My school life is very interesting
    Section D
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn the vowels
    2 Learn new words
    February newspaper hard wish
    3 Sum up the differences between the present continuous tense and the present simple tense and the useful expressions in this topic
    4 Learn how to write a letter
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机音标卡片单词卡片图片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复单词
    (单词竞赛)
    Example
    (组抢答题 限定时间组说出单词 单词分果中组说完整 组补充 予加分教师优胜组予适表扬鼓励)
    T The days of week Ready Go
    G1 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday SundayG2 …G3 ……
    T Great I’ll give each group seven scores Subjects Go
    G1 English Chinese math politics history geography music P E science …
    G2 …G3 ……
    T Excellent all of you are very good The adjectives of this topic
    G1 Easy difficult interesting boring funny useful hard …
    G2 …G3 ……
    T List the verbs and nouns of Topic 3 please…
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    呈现1完成2
    1 (呈现音标卡片学生熟悉发音面操练做准备)
    T Boys and girls please look at this card Can you read this word(举起clean单词卡片)
    Ss Clean
    T What about this one(举起eat单词卡片)
    Ss Eat

    (样方法呈现音标( ( (( (运头脑风暴法求学生说出发音单词进行纳)
    (板书)
    clean eat leaf (( bread head pleasure (
    tree green feet (( ear tear hear ((
    teacher worker computer ( monkey money honey (
    2 (放1录音学生读)
    T OK please open your books on page 23 Let’s listen to the tape and follow it
    (播放录音)
    3 (总结字母组合ea ee ear er ey读音规出含述字母组合单词学生声读出)
    (板书)
    team heavy meet hear player donkey …
    4 (学生快速读2划出新单词根语境猜测词义必时予学生帮助)
    (呈现生词板书)
    February newspaper hard wish
    (熟读单词)
    5 (听2录音完成2问题)
    T Listen to the tape and answer the questions in 2
    6 (核答案讲解列词组)
    T Now let’s check the answers and learn the following phrases
    (1)School Times(校园时报)
    (2)Science Today(日科学)
    (3)learn…from…(……中学……)
    (4)thank sb for sthdoing sth(某事做某事感谢某)
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    巩固2完成3b
    1 (讲解英文书信格式英文信封写法)
    T Let’s learn how to write a letter and how to write an envelope in English
    (详见课文注释)
    2 (参话题学句型准备2分钟话完成3b)
    T Now boys and girls make a dialog with your partner
    Example
    T Hello how are youS Fine thank you
    T What day is it todayS It is Thursday
    T What class are we havingS We are having an English class
    T What time does the class beginS At eight o’clock
    T Which subject do you like best What’s your favorite subject Why
    S I like English best My favorite subject is English Because it’s easy and interesting
    T How many English lessons do you have every week
    S Five
    T How do you usually come to school
    S I usually come to school by bike
    T Do you have school newspaper
    S Yes I do
    T How do you like your school newspaper
    S It’s interesting I like it very much It is my favorite I can learn a lot from it
    T Thank you for answering my questions
    S You’re welcome
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    练现进行时般现时完成3a4
    1 (挂两张图黑板学生图回答问题)
    T Look at the pictures carefully Then answer the questions


    (板书问题)
    (1)What does Maria think of her school life
    (2)What is she doing at 2000 in Picture 2
    (3)What does she usually do at 2130 in Picture 3
    (4)What is she doing in Picture 4
    2 (通回答问题 学生复般现时现进行时 教师较纳两者间区完成3a)
    3 (学生4中图片 面问题进行问答 巩固两种时态)
    (1)What does Kangkang usually do…
    (2)What is he doing…
    4 (完成4)
    T Complete the passage according to the pictures
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通活动培养学生综合运力激发学生运英语兴趣鼓励学生胆创新
    1 (学生设计份学校生活容校报)
    (1)(全班学生分组讨准备3分钟组单位设计份校报)
    (2)(组根实际情况发挥)
    (3)(检查设计校报张贴教室学园里鼓励学生胆创新精神)
    2 (家庭作业)
    (学生搭档谈天 现进行时般现时写少6句子)
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    dinnersupper
    dinner意(中午晚吃)正餐餐supper意(通常指家吃)晚餐晚饭意义出dinner中午吃晚吃通常较正式较丰盛supper较简单英式英语中supper表示夜宵
    Unit 6 Our Local Area
    Topic 1 There is a study next to my bedroom
    Section A
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 (1)Learn the words of rooms in homes
    bedroom kitchen dining room living room bathroom
    (2)Learn other new words and phrases
    garden second floor upstairs come in house grandfather door
    2 (1)Learn some prepositions of position
    in on next to in front of behind
    (2)Learn the structure ofThere be
    Oh there are so many books on the shelves
    Is there a computer in your study Yes there is
    Are there any books in the study Yes there are
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机挂图单词卡片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复现进行时般现时引出1a中新词汇

    (方案)
    (老师黑板画幅简笔画学生图回答问题)
    T Boys and girls What’s Nancy doing
    Ss She is reading
    T Where is she reading now do you know
    Ss In the study
    T Yes She is reading in the study
    (We usually read in the study教师边说边黑板左方排写出read in the study教师继续问学生Then do you want to know where I sleepcookeatwatch TV…引导学生教师发问)
    S1 Where do you sleep
    T I sleep in the bedroom

    (次引导出in the kitchen…分板书read in the study面)
    (板书)
    read in the study
    sleep in the bedroom
    cook in the kitchen
    eat in the dining room
    bath in the bathroom
    watch TV in the living room
    (方案二)
    (名学生表演点动作 学睡觉洗澡餐煮饭电视等 学生逐猜动作点活动复Unit 5现进行时 时呈现出表示房间名词)
    (板书)
    living room dining room bathroom kitchen bedroom study
    Example
    T What’s heshe doingS2 HeShe is watching TV
    T And heshe is watching TV in the living room
    T Then what’s heshe doingS3 HeShe is studying
    T You are right
    T Where’s heshe studyingS4 HeShe is studying in the study
    T Good…
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间7分钟)
    呈现1a
    1 (呈现1a挂图指着图卧室发问指导学生回答)
    T What do you do in the bedroom
    Ss We sleep in it
    (指着挂图书房继续做问答练)
    T Where’s the study
    Ss It’s next to the bedroom
    T In the picture there is a study on the second floor And there are two bedrooms on the second floor
    (板书新句型 进行适讲解)
    —Where is your study
    —It’s on the second floor next to my bedroom
    —In the picture there is a study on the second floor And there are two bedrooms on the second floor
    (学生根1a图练There be…句型疑问句形式)
    T Is there a living room on the first floor Ss Yes there is
    T Are there two bedrooms on the first floor Ss No there aren’t
    garden upstairs come in
    (学生间进行话)
    S1 …
    S2 …
    (1) Where are the bedrooms
    (2) Where’s the study
    (3) Are there many books on the shelves
    (板书)
    2 (课前设置听力务 板书)
    T Now let’s listen to 1a and find out the answers to these questions Are you ready
    Ss Yes
    T OK Let’s begin
    (播放1a录音)
    3 (核答案 板书关键词)
    T Who can answer the first questionS1 They’re on the second floor
    T Well done What about the second question
    S2 It’s next to the bedroom
    T Good Thank you The last question
    study—second floor—next to—bedroom—books—shelves
    S3 Yes there are
    T Good job
    (板书)
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间8分钟)
    巩固1a 完成1b
    1 (放1a录音 学生读 铅笔标出重读语调)
    T Now please follow the tape and mark the stress and intonation with your pencil
    2 (学生擦标记号 先读 然读 核语音语调)
    T Erase the marks and read 1a by yourselves Then check your pronunciation and intonation according to the tape
    3 (机话)
    T Now listen to me carefully Suppose you are Jane Listen to the tape and make a dialog with Maria
    4 (学生黑板关键词 请学生台表演 然完成1b)
    T Now boys and girls please look at the key words and act out the dialogG1 …
    T Wonderful Any other groupsG2 …
    (学生表演进行点评)
    5 (检查核答案)
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间15分钟)
    练2a 完成2b
    1 (1)(学生认真听2a录音独立完成2a 学关房间名词)
    T Now listen to 2a and match them by yourselves
    (播放录音)
    (2)(呈现2a挂图 学生着教师已准备关房间单词卡片根录音容黑板前粘贴 句话说出位置)
    T Boys and girls put up the cards of places on the right places and say a sentence
    Example
    There is a study on the second floor
    There are two bedrooms on the second floor
    The garden is in front of the house

    (3)(核答案)
    T Now let’s check the answers Listen to me carefully and correct them
    Rooms on the first floor C D E G (from left to right)
    Rooms on the second floor A A B (from left to right)
    In front of the house F
    2 (学生2a图 搭档话完成2b学生准备分钟 然找组表演话)
    T Now let’s look at the picture in 2a and then finish 2b according to the example with your partner
    (分钟 学生表演)
    T Which group can act your dialog outG We can
    (表演话)
    T Great Any more…
    3 (教师名学生先做示范 学生仿示范完成3)
    T Please be quiet Listen to us carefully
    Example T Where’s your fatherS1 He is in front of the house
    T What’s he doingS1 He’s cleaning the car
    (学生搭档讨 完成话)
    grandfather door behind
    T Make conversations with your partner nowS2 …S3 …
    (板书领读生词)
    (学生根话3中短语连句)
    T Please make sentences according to the words and phrases in the boxes in 3
    法制教育:

    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通活动 增强学生综合运力
    1 (呈现学生张表格 介绍教室)
    There is
    a teacher
    a clock
    a blackboard

    There are
    students
    books
    desks

    2 (完成4)
    (1)(学生画张家图片 英文标出画房间物品名称)
    T Draw a picture of your own house and mark the names of rooms and home items
    (2)(运演讲形式 学生介绍喜欢房间房间里什)
    T Make a report to introduce your favorite room and what is in it
    Example
    My favorite room is my study It’s behind the garden I can do my homework there There’s a computer in it There’s also a TV in it I often watch TV in my study…
    (3)(学生四组做关What’s your favorite room调查报告 然全班分组调查 机抽学生家汇报)
    Example
    ××’s favorite room is hisher study HeShe can study in hisher study…
    (4)(找找)
    (出示张房间图片 学生找物品位置 引出What’s in that room课作铺垫)
    T Boys and girls What’s in that roomSs There is a bed a light …
    T Where is the deskSs It’s near the window
    T Very good Let’s begin…
    3 (家庭作业)
    (学生画幅理想中房子英语进行简单描述少6句子)
    T Draw a picture of your ideal house Then write a short passage about it (At least six sentences)
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    play with意玩耍游戏玩乐指童活动:
    The child is playing with a ball 孩子正玩球
    play意玩踢等意思时常指正式球类运动演奏活动:
    They are playing basketball on the playground 正操场篮球

    Unit 6 Our Local Area
    Topic 1 There is a study next to my bedroom
    Section B
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 (1)Learn the names of home items
    lamp clock table key window
    (2)Learn other new words and phrases
    talk about near under put away thing dad model river
    2 Go on learning the structure ofThere be and the prepositions of position
    What’s on your desk There is a lamp a computer some books and so on
    How much water is there Only a little
    How many boats are there on the river There are two
    3 Learn to look after one’s own things
    Put it away please
    You must look after your things
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机挂图实物
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间6分钟)
    复There be句型 导入1a
    1 (黑板呈现张漂亮两层楼挂图 书房卧室厨房餐厅客厅卫生间花园复There be句型)
    (图走 求学生着记忆 描述张图 采竞赛形式 组竞赛 单位竞赛 教师予奖励 激发学生学热情)
    (竞赛规参赛者规定两分钟描述张图 说句 分 谁分 谁获胜)
    T Look at the picture for one minute Then I’ll take it away You need to say as many sentences as possible about it in two minutes
    Example
    There’s a study on the second floor
    There’s a garden in front of the house
    There are some flowers in the garden
    The living room is next to the dining room

    2 (利1a挂图 引导学生复There be句型 引入新单词新句型)
    T Now let’s look at the picture What can you see in it
    S1 I can see a sofa
    T Oh I see It’s near the desk
    S2 I can see a family photo
    T Can you see a clock on the wall It’s near the photo

    T What’s on the desk
    Ss There is a lamp a computer some books and so on
    T We can also say There are some books a lamp a computer and so on Is there a clock on
    (1) What’s on your desk
    There is a lamp a computer some books and so on
    (2) Is there a clock on it
    Yes there is No there isn’t
    (3) It’s near the desk
    it
    Ss No there isn’t
    (学生通观察发现规律)
    (板书)
    Explain the phrase talk about
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间6分钟)
    呈现1a
    (1) Where’s the sofa
    (2) What’s on the desk
    (3) Where is the clock
    1 (学生听1a录音 回答面问题)
    T Listen to 1a and answer the questions
    (板书)
    (核答案)
    2 (学生听1a注意语音语调)
    T Please listen to the tape and pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation
    3 (学生根语音语调分角色朗读1a)
    T Please work in pairs and read the dialog in roles
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间8分钟)
    巩固1a 完成1b
    1 (学生合书 1a挂图 描述Jane书房 巩固There be句型)
    T Please close your books and look at the picture in 1a Then describe Jane’s study OK
    2 (根1a 两组谈书房卧室…… 完成1b学生理解under)
    T Now I’ll give you some minutes to talk about your studybedroom … Then act out your
    dialogs in pairs
    Example
    S1 What’s in your study
    S2 There isare …
    S1 Is there aan …
    S2 Yes there isNo there isn’t
    3 (学生根1a学试着句话描述书房卧室……)
    T According to la try to use some sentences to describe your study bedroom …
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间15分钟)
    通练 完成2 3 4
    1 (1)(学生2图 听录音 完成2学生掌握生词table key put away dadthing)
    T Look at the pictures in 2 and listen to the tape and finish 2
    (2)(听完录音 核答案)
    T Who can tell us your answersS1 on There are keysS2 behind There’s away
    T That’s right
    (3)学列句子(理解)
    a I think they’re Judy’sb Don’t put them there Put them away please
    c You must look after your things
    2 (课前准备实物 学生There be句型回答)
    (方案)
    (教师书包中取出香蕉藏身导出新句型)
    T Are there any bananas in my bagSs No there aren’t They are behind you
    T How many bananas are thereSs There are two
    T Well done
    (出示装少水瓶子导出新句型)
    T Now please look at my hand What’s in itSs There is a bottle in it
    How many+数名词复数形式+are there …
    There are…
    How much+数名词+is there …
    There is…
    T Is there any water in the bottleSs Yes there is
    T How much water is thereSs Only a little
    (板书)
    (方案二)
    (教师出示三香蕉)
    T Now please look here What’s in my hand
    Ss There are three bananas
    (香蕉装入书包中)
    ①T Are there any bananas in my bag
    Ss Yes there are
    T How many bananas are there(句子面画线示注意)
    Ss There are three
    T Well done boys and girls
    (oranges books等数名词进行pair workchain drills操练学生纳
    How many+数名词复数形式+are there… )
    ②(教师边说Oh we’ve talked so long I think you must want to drink a little water边装点水杯子递学生示意作答)
    T Is there any water in your cup
    S Yes there is
    T How much water is there(句子面画线)
    S Only a little
    T Excellent(身体语言竖起拇指)
    (milk tea等数名词进行pair workchain drills操练学生纳
    How much+数名词+is there… )
    (板书形式)
    ①中话
    How many+ + there …
    ②中话
    How much+ + there …
    3 (学生3图片 完成3学生掌握生词windowmodel)
    T Let’s go to 3 There are eight pictures in it First read the dialogs below Picture 1 and 2 by yourselves for one minute
    (分钟)
    T Now let’s look at Picture 1 and 2 Make new dialogs according to Picture 1 and 2
    (两分钟 挑选两组表演)
    T I’ll choose two pairs to act them out
    G1 A What’s near the window
    B There is a guitar near it
    G2 A Are there any books on the shelf
    B Yes there are
    (学生模仿34 完成话)
    T Read the dialogs below Picture 3 and 4 and make similar dialogs
    G3 A What’s in the treeB There’re some birds in it
    A How many birds are there B There are three
    G4 A Is there any milk in the glassB Yes there is
    A How much milk is there B Only a little
    4 (4图片 两组编话学生掌握生词river)
    T Please look at the picture in 4 then work in pairs and make new dialogs like this
    Dialog 1 S3 What’s in the picture
    S4 There are some dogs in it
    Dialog 2 S5 Are there any monkeys in the tree
    S6 Yes there are
    S5 How many monkeys are there
    S6 There are three
    (求学生样方法编话 完成4)
    T Pay attention to the differences between in the rivertree and on the rivertree
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通活动培养学生实际操作力
    1 (找找课前实物 铅笔尺子书包刀等放教室位置 学生找物品说明某什)
    Example
    S1 Where is the pencilbox S2 It’s on the desk
    S1 What’s under the desk
    S2 There is a pencil a ruler a knife and two pens
    S1 …S2 …
    (开展话活动时 求学生特注意in on next to in front of behind等介词 重点练What’s oninnext to…?There isare…)
    2 (方案 学生两组图文形式介绍家里某房间物品摆放中名学生画图 名学生配文字说明 站讲台前学生描述)
    Example
    My Study
    There’s a family photo on the wall of my study A clock is next to it There is a desk and a chair in the study What’s on the desk There are some books and a computer There’s a football under the chair Behind the desk there’s a cat Do you like the study
    (活动结束 学生选出佳搭档 教师予鼓励表扬)
    (方案二 两组活动 中名学生文字描述某房间 外名学生画图 图展示出 学生选出佳搭档 教师予鼓励表扬)
    3 (家庭作业)
    (学生根4中图片写篇短文少60字)
    T Write a short passage according to the picture in 4 (at least 60 words)



    Unit 6 Our Local Area
    Topic 1 There is a study next to my bedroom
    Section C
    I Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    in the center of yard beautiful flower large left people mirror drawer chair keyboard
    2 Go on learning the prepositions of position and the structure of There be
    (1)Talk about positions
    Our bathroom is on the right of the yard
    Where are the shoes They’re under the bed
    Where is the computer It’s on the desk
    (2)Talk about existence
    There is a small garden in the center of the yard
    There are many beautiful flowers in the garden But there aren’t any trees
    At the back of the yard there is a nice house
    Near the house there is an apple tree
    On the left of the yard there is a kitchen and a dining room
    Are there many beautiful flowers in the garden
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机挂图图片简笔画
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复There be句型 引出1a
    1 (检查点评节课布置家庭作业)
    2 (全班分成4组利1a图片组组间进行问答赛)
    (竞赛规:全班分成4组组回答问题 提出新问题外组学生回答问题重复第问题教师问第组回答)
    T What’s in the picture
    G1 There’s a nice house Where’s the garden
    G2 It’s in front of the house Is there a big tree
    G3 Yes there is Where is it
    G4 It’s near the house

    (总结赛结果进行鼓励表扬)
    (教师引导学生图利已学知识引出1a新词汇)
    T You’re great Now let’s talk about the picture together Look There is a nice house a garden a tree a car and two small houses in the yard The garden is in the center of the yard Can you see many beautiful flowers Where are they
    Ss Yes In the garden
    T Can you find the kitchen S1
    S1 Yes It’s beside the house
    T You’re right We can also say It’s on the left of the yard Then who can tell where the bathroom is
    S2 I can It’s on the right of the yard
    T Is the bathroom small or large boys and girls
    Ss It’s small
    (板书)
    Yard in the center of beautiful flower left large
    (学生朗读必时教师帮助)
    T Now please read aloud the new words on the blackboard
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间8分钟)
    呈现1a
    1 (呈现听力务听1a录音判断句子正误)
    T Listen to 1a carefully and mark True (T) or False (F)
    ( ) (1) The house is in the center of the yard
    ( ) (2) There are some trees in the garden
    ( ) (3) There is a large living room in the house
    ( ) (4) Their bathroom is on the left of the yard
    ( ) (5) There are some birds singing in the tree
    (放遍录音边听边核答案注意语音语调)
    2 (学生朗读1a 次画出介绍院中建筑物位置关键词 然核)
    T Read 1a and then underline the key words that introduce the positions of the buildings in the yard Then check the answers
    T Can we share your answers S3
    S3 Certainly …
    T Good

    (然核)
    T The answers are center back left right
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间7分钟)
    巩固1a 完成1b
    1 (学生仔细阅读1a 完成1b 然教师核答案求学生掌握生词people)
    T Now please read 1a carefully Finish 1b and then I will check the answers
    2 (全班分成四组 学生1a中关键词句找出列纸组选出名成员点复述短文)
    T The class will be divided into four groups List some key words and sentences on your paper and retell the passage according to the key words I’ll choose one student in each group to retell it
    Example
    This is my home There is a small garden in the center of the yard And in the garden there are many beautiful flowers…
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间15分钟)
    练方位介词 完成2 3
    1 (教师已准备图片贴黑板 :树椅子…… 找学生图片画出东西运已学方位介词There be句型造句)
    Example
    There is a red car in front of the classroom
    2 (出示图片简笔画教学新单词drawer chair keyboard pencilbox mirror介词in on under behind in front of进行操练)
    (出示抽屉椅子键盘铅笔盒镜子简笔画)




    T Look at the picturethe stick figure and learn the new word drawer
    (简笔画中添支笔 操练介词inunder)
    Example
    T What’s in the drawer
    Ss There is a pen in it
    T What’re under the drawer
    Ss There are some pens under it
    (样方法 完成介词操练)
    (板书)
    drawer chair keyboard pencilbox mirror
    3 (学生独立完成2 教师核答案)
    T Finish 2 by yourselves and then we will check the answers together
    (核完答案 学生两组练话)
    T OK Practice the dialogs in pairs After a while I’ll ask three pairs to read the dialogs
    4 (1)(两组找出3中两幅图片处制作份处清单)
    T Work in pairs to find out the differences between the two pictures in 3 And then make a list of differences
    (2)(学生两组根3中AB图片分角色编话根话容图片完成填空)
    T Now work in pairs and make new dialogs according to Picture A and B in 3 And fill in the blanks
    Example
    S1 What color is the bag in Picture A
    S2 It’s green
    S1 What about the bag in Picture B
    S2 It’s yellow What’s on the desk in Picture A
    S1 There is a computer and a keyboard
    S2 What’s on the desk in Picture B
    S1 There are some pencils some books and a lamp
    S2 Are there any shelves in Picture A
    S1 Yes there are What’s on the shelves
    S2 There are some books and a model plane
    (核答案)
    法制教育:


    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通活动 培养学生创新力
    1 (结活动中名学生名学生描述卧室书房客厅……里物体 求外名学生房间里物体放合适方 房间更加方漂亮 图描绘出两起文字表达出组设计卧室书房客厅……佳 予鼓励)
    Example
    S1 There is a desk a chair a bookcase a computer a soccer a TV a lamp a kite a guitar a vase a map of China a family photo a clock some flowers some pictures and some books in the study
    S2 OK I can draw them well

    2 (家庭作业)
    (学生两张卧室挂图求学生写篇关两卧室处短文)
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    英语中介词运灵活 根具体位置选应介词 根汉语直译选择
    onin the wall
    There is a window in the wall 墙扇窗户
    There is a picture on the wall 墙幅画

















    Unit 6 Our Local Area
    Topic 1 There is a study next to my bedroom
    Section D
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn the vowels
    2 (1)Review the prepositions of position
    (2)Review the structure ofThere be
    3 Review home items
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机图片单词卡片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间6分钟)
    复单词
    1 (方案:听写单词话题单词词性类然进行听写活动旨加强学生单词记忆运话题写作练奠定基础)
    ①(名词名词短语):floor bedroom kitchen garden bathroom grandfather house door lamp clock table key thing dad window model river center yard flower people mirror drawer chair keyboard pencilbox living room dining room
    ②(介词介词短语):behind near under next to in front of in the center of on the left at the back of
    ③(数词副词形容词):second upstairs away beautiful large left
    ④(动词短语):come in talk about put away
    (方案二:单词竞赛单元单词词组功分类制成单词卡片教师出中文意思学生说英文求名学生必答两单词词分然进行全班抢答)
    T Now let’s have a word competition I’ll give you Chinese meaning Please say them in English Each word you’ll get one point Are you ready OK Go

    T Well done This time let’s have a quick answer If you know you can stand up and answer quickly Yeah begin
    (必答单词:second floor bedroom upstairs kitchen garden grandfather front house behind door near lamp clock under table key away thing dad window model river center yard beautiful flower large left bathroom people drawer chair keyboard)
    (抢答词组:next to come in dining room living room in front of talk about put away in the center of on the left at the back of)
    (通单词词组必答抢答 进步巩固单元词汇 培养竞争意识 调动学积极性)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间5分钟)
    呈现1
    1 (呈现含((发音单词卡片 学生熟悉发音 面操练做准备)
    T How do you read this word (呈现bird单词卡片)
    Ss Bird
    T What about this one (呈现girl单词卡片)
    Ss Girl
    girl bird shirt
    (板书girl bird shirt画线ir帮助学生找规律)
    2 (样步骤教学
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固1
    1 (学生听1录音声读)
    T Listen to the tape and then read after it
    (听1录音 学生听完三单词 快速说出汉语意思)
    T Listen to the tape again and say the Chinese meaning quickly after every three words
    2 (学生纳含读音单词)
    T Let’s sum up the words that have the pronunciations
    For example
    first thirty thirteen …know boat coat right night light …
    horse short sport …
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间17分钟)
    通练完成2 4a4b
    1 (1)(学生根听2录音 完成2)
    T Listen to 2 and draw a picture according to what you will hear
    (学生先写关键词 录音停止画)
    (2)(核完答案 选出佳图画 张贴教室里接着求学生图写出刚听句子 巩固学介词There be句型)
    T Please write the sentences that you heard just now according to the picture
    2 (1)(学生纳整理话题重点加深印象巩固记忆四组进行学名学生负责纳整理Section重点句型词组四名学生总结结果汇总起全班学生汇报全班学享Topic 1重点句型词组课4a4b)
    (2)(告诉学生合书完成列题目目巩固加强单元重点4a4b然核答案)
    T Please close your books and finish the questions below
    A:适介词介词短语副词填空
    ①There is a computer her study
    ②—Where is your study—It’s the second floor my bedroom
    ③—Are there any shoes the bed—Yes there are
    ④—What’s the house—There’s a car
    ⑤There is a small garden the center the yard
    ⑥You must look your things and put them
    参考答案:①in ②on next tonear ③under ④in front ofbehind ⑤in of ⑥after away
    B:根括号求完成句子
    ①There is a computer in picture B(变成否定句)
    ②There are three bedrooms a large living room on the second floor(变成般疑问句)
    ③Are there any boats on the river(做出肯定回答否定回答)
    ④There are three model planes on the desk(画线处提问)
    ⑤There is only a little water in the bottle(④)
    参考答案:
    ①There isn’t a computer in picture B
    ②Are there three bedrooms a large living room on the second floor
    ③Yes there are No there aren’t
    ④How many model planes are there on the desk
    ⑤How much water is there in the bottle
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间12分钟)
    通活动 培养学生实际运力
    1 (结活动张图案鲜明图片S1 S1图中容S1图面学生 S1问问题 学生回答S1根学生描述黑板画出幅图学生S1分活动够活跃课堂气氛 激发学生学兴趣)
    Example
    S1 What can you see in the pictureS2 There is a horse in the picture
    S1 What elseS3 There is a man on the horse
    S1 Is the horse running or walkingS4 The horse is running
    S1 What else can you seeS5 The sky is blue and there are many trees in the picture

    (增加教学弹性 换图做两次)
    2 (完成5学生四组 做调查 伴房间里什东西 先作汇报接着选学 房间里东西放合适方 图体现出谁设计效果 张贴教室里 予表扬)
    (1)T Work in groups of four Make a survey about the things in your classmates’ rooms
    Name
    Thing and position




    T Report to your group using the sentences like this
    There is…There isn’t…
    There are…There aren’t…
    It’s oninbehindin front of…
    They’re oninbehindin front of…
    (2)T Then draw a room The student who draws the things in the best place is the winner
    3 (家庭作业)
    (学生朋友写封信介绍家房间分类房子周围环境少70字完成3)
    T Write a letter to your friend Describe rooms in your house and the things around them Finish 3 (at least 70 words)
    参考范文:
    Dear Mary
    I’m very glad to get a letter from you From your letter I know your home is beautiful I want to tell you something about my home too
    My house is very big There are two bedrooms and a small study There is a computer in my study I love playing games and studying on the computer Next to the computer there is a shelf On the shelf there are some books
    There are many trees around my house In front of my house there is a beautiful garden There are many beautiful flowers in it
    I like my home very much
    Yours
    Li Hua

    Unit 6 Our Local Area
    Topic 2 My home is in an apartment building
    Section A
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words
    country month Mrs furniture quiet
    2 Talk about the types of buildings
    townhouse farmhouse apartment …
    3 Learn to read and write the ads for house renting
    (1) Small apartment for students 850 a month
    (2) House with three bedrooms Call Mrs Tong in the evening
    (3) House with furniture for a family of three
    (4) Looking for a quiet double room under300 per month
    4 Learn to find out the language rules and give more examples
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机房屋图片幻灯片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复There be句型 引入1a
    1 (方案)
    (教室里情况复There be句型)
    T Boys and girls please make sentences withThere bestructure
    (支钢笔放讲台)
    S1 There is a pen on the teacher’s desk
    (出示尺子 放手)
    S2 There are many rulers in your hand
    S3 …
    T Good You are great
    (方案二)
    (教学生唱面歌 活跃气氛 复There be句型 然导入课)
    There are books on the tables
    There are children on the chairs
    There are pencils in our hands
    And there’s a teacher over there
    There are words on the blackboard
    There are pictures on the walls
    But the cute animal in my pocket is the best thing of all
    T Let’s chant
    (幻灯片展示)
    2 (教师ABC三幅图 呈现学生引导学生学1a新词汇
    句型)
    T Now let’s look at the pictures Which one does your home look like S4
    S4 A looks like my house
    T This is an apartment building Boys and girls what kind of home does S4
    live in
    A
    Ss An apartment building
    (样方法呈现学BC两幅图 引入1a)
    (板书 英汉)
    apartment building 公寓楼
    townhouse市镇住宅
    B
    farmhouse 农舍
    What kind of home do you live in家什样?
    It’s an apartment building座公寓楼
    3 (话形式练种房子类型)
    T Which house do you like best
    S5 I like townhouses best
    C
    S6 I like apartment buildings best
    S7 I like farmhouses best
    T Good job I know some of you like townhouses some of you like farmhouses but Kangkang likes apartment buildings best Do you know what kind of home Wang Wei likes
    (通问题形式 然渡步)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间5分钟)
    呈现1a
    1 (设置板书听力务 学生带着务听录音)
    (1)What kind of home does Kangkang live in
    (2)What kind of home does Wang Wei live in
    (3)What kind of home do Wang Wei’s grandparents live in
    2 (学生听1a录音 回答问题然师生起核答案)
    T Listen to the tape and answer the questions Then we will check the answers together
    3 (关键词写黑板 呈现1a 步学生书话基础)
    kind of home——an apartment——a townhouse——
    grandparents——live in a big farmhouse——in the country——
    Michael——looking for——near——let’s help
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    巩固1a 完成1b
    1 (1)(放1a录音 学生听 注意语音语调)
    T Now let’s listen to the tape again Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation
    (2)(学生模仿录音两组互换角色朗读话)
    T Pair work Read 1a aloud in different roles imitating the tape
    (3)(老师引领学生根黑板关键词复述1a)
    T Retell 1a after me according to the key words on the blackboard
    (4)(学生两组黑板关键词表演话)
    T Work in pairs Act 1a out according to the key words on the blackboard
    2 (学生完成1b相互核答案)
    T Finish 1b by yourselves and then check the answers with each other
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间15分钟)
    呈现2a 完成2b 2c
    1 (呈现出求租广告)
    WANTED
    House with furniture for a family of three
    Please call Mr Li at 88384558
    T Here’s an ad
    T The ad shows Mr Li wants to rent a house from others If Mr Brown has a house for a family of three what phone number can he call at
    Ss He can call Mr Li at 88384558
    T Yes Mr Brown has a house for rent And he can also write an ad Let us help him
    FOR RENT
    House with furniture for a family of three
    Please call Mr Brown at 86364328
    (板书求学生理解rent)
    T The ad shows Mr Brown wants to rent his house to others
    2 (呈现2a 完成2b)
    (1)(黑板画出表格学生听录音填表格)
    T Listen to the tape and complete the table

    Name
    What kind of house
    Tel
    FOR RENT
    Ms Zhang
    small apartment for students

    Mrs Tong

    66285669
    WANTED

    house with furniture
    88384558
    Bob

    13973824946
    (2)(学生听2a录音核答案)
    T Now listen to the tape again and then check the answers
    (学生听录音时教师板书2a中出现生词听完录音教读生词)
    month Mrs furniture quiet per
    (3)(学生阅读2a完成2b)
    T OK Next I want you to read 2a and finish 2b I will check your answers in 3 minutes
    3 (学生完成2c假设林林家房子出租屋家具齐全电话号码88576391琳达家租套带三卧室房子电话号码66319245请学生帮助设计两广告全班学生分成两组 组写求租广告 组写出租广告 组完成快)
    T Suppose Linlin wants to rent a house with furniture to others His telephone number is 88576391 Linda wants a house with three bedrooms Her telephone number is 66319245 Please help them write two ads I will divide the class into two groups one group writes the ad for being wanted and the other group writes the ad for rent Then let’s see which group does better
    法制教育:

    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通活动提高学生总结纳应力
    1 (黑板写出1a2a中出现三短语学生学会已掌握知识中总结纳语言规加运)
    (板书)
    a townhouse with two floors
    house with three bedrooms
    house with furniture
    (学生发现结构规律量写出类似短语谁写)
    T Look at the three phrases from 1a and 2a Think them over and find out the rules of their structures Then write out the similar phrases as many as you can Let’s see who does the best
    For example
    a house with a large garden
    an apartment with twenty floors
    a girl with big eyes
    a boy with long hair

    2 (全班分成四组做调查 三分钟请名学生全班汇报完成1c)
    T Now let’s survey about different types of homes in your group And report it to your class three minutes later
    Home
    Number
    Home
    Number
    apartment

    townhouse

    farmhouse

    dormitory

    Example
    S1 What kind of home do you live in
    S2 It’s an apartment
    (三分钟 名学生汇报)
    T Stop here please I’ll ask one student of each group to tell us the result You may do it like this
    In our group three students live in apartment buildings and two students live in
    3 (假设张先生家三口外北京做生意 想求租家具房子 请学生写广告 张先生电话号码88392357)
    T Help Mr Zhang write an ad to rent a house with furniture for a family of three please And
    his telephone number is 88392357
    4 (家庭作业)
    (1)(学生写租房广告求租广告)
    T Write an ad for rent and an ad for being wanted
    (2)(学生课预Section B)
    T Preview Section B








    Unit 6 Our Local Area
    Topic 2 My home is in an apartment building
    Section B
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 (1)Learn the names of public places and facilities
    store bank street post office bookstore museum parking lot supermarket station restaurant reading room road
    (2)Learn other new words and phrases
    neighbor corner mail hear piano loud really at the end of …
    2 (1)Go on learning the structure ofThere be
    There is one in front of our building
    There are no houses on the right
    (2)Go on learning the prepositions of position
    There is one on the street corner
    Mr Smart lives at the end of Elm Road
    Mr Jackson lives between Mr Smart and Mr Lee
    3 Talk about the facilities and living environments in the community
    4 Talk about the relationships between neighbors and learn to understand others’ feelings and respect each other
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机张区示意图
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间6分钟)
    复There be句型 呈现1b
    1 (接龙游戏全班分成组 There be句型说出教室里物品位置关系 组组间
    进行提问赛)
    T What’s in the classroom
    G1 There are four windows in the wall What’s on the wall
    G2 There is a clock and some pictures on the wall What’s on the desk
    G3 …
    2 (学生展示张生活区周边示意图 1b中单词词组介绍区附设施名称)

    T Look at the map Here is a bank We can keep money in the bank Can you guess the
    meaning of the word bank
    Ss 银行
    T Yes you’re right Where can we buy things Of course we can buy things in the store or supermarket So what’s the meaning of store or supermarket
    Ss 商店

    (板书学生读板书单词短语)
    bank store museum bookstore parking lot post office supermarket hospital train station
    (根示意图学生提问 复There be句型物体位置表达法)
    T Look at the map again Is there a bank in the area
    Ss Yes there is
    T Is there a zoo
    Ss No there isn’t
    T Where is the museum
    Ss It’s next to the bookstore

    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间6分钟)
    呈现1a
    1 (告诉学生迈克尔新搬进区 知道区里商店银行里学生听1a录音 判断正误)
    T Michael is new in this community He doesn’t know where the store and bank are Now let’s listen to 1a and mark True (T) or False (F)
    (板书需判断正误句子)
    ( )(1) There is a store near here
    ( )(2) There is a bank in front of the building
    ( )(3) Michael and Mary are good friends
    (播放1a录音 然核答案)
    T Who can share your answers with us
    S1 I can Number 1 is T Number 2 is F Number 3 is F
    2 (学生听1a录音 找出关键词)
    T Please listen to the tape again and circle the key words
    (教师总结板书)
    new neighbor——look for——store——in front of——bank——corner
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固1a
    1 (学生录音机朗读1a 注意语音语调)
    T Please read 1a after the tape Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation
    2 (学生黑板关键词 两组表演话)
    T Look at the key words on the blackboard and act out the dialog in pairs
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间20分钟)
    练1b 1c3 呈现2a完成2b
    1 (1)(学生完成1b 区设施名称功配)
    T We know there are many facilities in one area and we can do different things in different places Now look at the pictures in 1b Match the pictures with the things we can do
    (2)(区公设施功做问答练板书应设施功核答案)
    T What can we do in a post office
    S1 Mail letters
    T Where can we keep money
    S2 Bank

    restaurant eat meals
    hotel sleep
    hairdresser’s get a haircut
    shoe shop buy shoes
    clothing store buy clothes
    (3)(1b 拓展区设施功)
    (板书)
    2 (1)(学生完成1c)
    ①T Suppose you are in an area Let’s listen to the tape and check the places in your area
    (核A答案)
    T What’s in your area
    Ss Bookstore parking lot bank restaurant post office and hospital
    ②(学生听录音注意公设施间位置关系)
    T Listen to the tape again and pay more attention to the location relations among the public facilities
    (核B答案然学生根答案语言表达出公设施间位置关系)
    T Check the answers And then express their location relations in your own words
    (2)(求学生讲述生活区中邻居位置关系然完成3教师核答案掌握生词at the end ofroad)
    T Please tell us where the neighbors live in your area Then finish 3 and we will check the answers
    3 (1)(呈现2a图 利图通师生互动导出heardoing学生学会英语交流中注意理解情感学会相互尊重)
    T Look at the picture Who is that girl
    Ss She is Mary
    T What is she doing
    Ss She is playing the piano at home
    T Right She is playing the piano when Michael is working in his home He can hear the music and can’t work So he comes to Mary’s home What’s his first sentence Do you know
    (学生发挥想象尝试环境语言表达教师评价引导出答案)
    T He says I hear you playing the piano The music is very beautiful but I’m afraid it’s too loud
    (板书讲解hear…doing引导学生领悟… but I’m afraid …句式表达包含情感态度)
    hear … doing
    T What does Mary answer
    Ss I’m really sorry about that
    (讲解生词理解matter掌握piano loud really)
    (2)(学生听2a录音 读话)
    T Please listen to the tape and repeat it
    4 (学生两组表演2a)
    T Now work in pairs to act out the dialog
    5 (完成2b两组2b中情景求编话然抽组表演通项练 培养学生综合运语言做事力理解生词loudlyreading room)
    T Practice in pairs After three minutes I’ll ask some pairs to act it out
    法制教育:


    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间8分钟)
    通练 培养学生综合运力
    1 (猜)
    (学生分组描述代表性区公场 组学生猜什方 组少信息猜)
    Example
    T This is a place where we can keep money Can you guess it
    Ss Yes it’s a bank
    T Very good Let’s begin
    G1 …
    G2 …
    2 (学生做调查调查否喜欢邻居邻居样完成调查表)
    T Do you like your neighbors What do you think of your neighbors Please make a survey and complete the table
    Neighbor
    Quiet
    Noisy
    Polite
    Friendly

    A





    B





    (学生根调查表 介绍邻居 进行简单评价)
    T Please tell us something about your neighbors
    S3 I have two neighbors One is a teacher and the other is a driver The teacher is very helpful and he often helps me with my lessons He works very hard and he gets up very early and comes home very late But he never makes too much noise The driver is …

    3 (家庭作业)
    (学生画张居住区图 介绍设施设施位置)














    Unit 6 Our Local Area
    Topic 2 My home is in an apartment building
    Section C
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    child a lot of close to far from service area stop fan line bad someone check right now
    2 Go on learning the structure ofThere be
    There are many old people living here
    There are a lot of tall buildings and small gardens in our community
    Is there a community service center in your area
    3 Talk about living environments
    4 Learn to make telephone calls for help
    Hello this is Linda speaking
    Sorry I can’t hear you The line is bad
    There is something wrong with my kitchen fan
    I’ll get someone to check it right now
    5 Cultivate the students’ responsibility and service consciousness
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机单词卡片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间7分钟)
    放录音 引入1a
    1 (放3录音 全班学生学唱 活跃课堂气氛)
    T Please sing the song Home on the Range after the tape together
    2 (检查家庭作业复区公设施名称)
    T Let’s check the homework and review the names of Public places and facilities
    3 (1) (单词竞赛必答抢答形式呈现 必答两排学生 名学生两单词 单词
    Section AB单词表中黑体部分抢答单词课出现单词词组 谁知道谁站起 教师单词卡片呈现汉语 学生说英语1单词1分 然学生知道单词进行教读 单词词组板书通竞赛 学生积极参 动学)
    T Now let’s have a word competition First the required answers There are two words for each student I’ll give you the Chinese meanings You say them in English Do you understand Row 3 please
    (板书)
    station restaurant mail supermarket museum street bank neighbor country
    month corner furniture quiet store road hear piano end really loud Mrs
    (2) (呈现抢答单词词组 求学生抢答)
    T Good Go on with our quick responses If you know you can stand up quickly and answer Are you ready Go
    (板书)
    right now someone check area close to child far from service stop fan line bad
    (3) (学生答错单词集中起 全班齐读)
    T Well done Let’s read together
    4 (1)(安排名学生站教室面 教师利种情景 1a部分中关键词句型呈现出 学生学1a扫清部分障碍)
    T Oh look There are a lot of students standing there Where are they They are close to the back door They are at the end of the classroom They are far from here
    (板书画线部分关键词齐读学生熟悉)
    There are a lot of students standing there Where are they
    close to far from
    community service center
    area
    (2)(师生问答练梳理1a情境)
    T Listen and answer my questions Do you live in a community
    S1 Yes I do
    T How is your community
    S1 It’s quiet
    T Is there a service center in your community
    S1 Yes there is
    T Can you get help from service center in your community
    S1 Yes I can

    T Wow your community is great Now I want to know how Linda’s community is
    (引出1a)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间6分钟)
    (呈现1a)
    1 (呈现1a图片 学生快速浏览1a中问题 带着务快速阅读)
    T Linda lives in Yushancun What’s Yushancun like Let’s read the passage quickly and find out the answers to the questions in 1a
    (1) It’s quiet
    (2) Yes there are
    (3) It’s in an apartment building
    (4) No it isn’t
    2 (核答案)
    T Answer the questions and then check the answers
    (板书)
    3 (求学生次阅读找关键词 呈现黑板 步做准备)
    quiet a lot of apartment many close to near far from center
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    巩固1a
    1 (求学生黑板关键词听1a录音 加深印象)
    T Listen to the tape Close your books and look at the key words on the blackboard
    2 (求学生利课文1a图片问题关键词复述短文)
    T OK who can retell the text You can use the picture the questions or the key words
    3 (学生组讨1b中问题完成1b)
    T What’s your home like Please discuss the questions in 1b with your group members
    (检查讨结果)
    T Who wants to tell us something about your area
    S1 I live in Baibuting Garden My home is in an apartment building There are a lot of tall buildings and small gardens in our community There are many people living in our community The bus stop is near my home The shops are also close to my house Oh there is a community service center in my area I like living here very much…

    4 (设计理想区蓝图求学生量There be … doing sth句子结构展示作品教师予评价)
    T Are you satisfied with your community What is your ideal community Please ask your partner some questions about hisher ideal community and write a passage about your ideal community using more There be… doing sth At the same time you may draw a community plan Please don’t look at each other’s
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间12分钟)
    呈现2a完成2a2b
    1 (呈现2a)
    (1)(学生听2a录音 完成2a)
    T As we all know in many areas there is a community service center If we have problems we can call it for help Now Linda is calling the community service center Let’s listen to the tape and find out what’s the matter with her
    (学生听完录音 回答问题)
    T OK stop here What’s the matter with Linda
    Ss There is something wrong with her kitchen fan It doesn’t work
    T How does Linda deal with it
    Ss She calls the community service center for help
    (2)(设置情景学生应新语言知识)
    T Who has model cars or planes
    S2 I have
    T Does it work well
    S2 No it doesn’t
    T You should get someone to check it(边说边板书get sb to do sth)
    S2 OK
    T Now Work in pairs to make similar dialogs
    (3)(提供关键词 学生两组练话)
    (板书)
    live——matter——fan——can’t hear——wrong——check——right now
    T Please practice the conversation according to the key words with your partner
    2 (完成2b 学生两组编话)
    T So we know if we have problems we can do as Linda calling the community service center Now suppose there is something wrong with your TVcomputer… and you want to get help from a community service center Please make a dialog about it with your partner according to 2a
    (组学生表演朗读编话)
    T Who wants to act out or read your dialog
    S3 Our group
    T OK very good You can begin
    S3 Hello the First City Community Service Center What can I do for you
    S4 Hello this is Sally speaking I live in

    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通活动培养学生解决实际问题力
    1 (学生全班学生做调查 果家里生活品坏 解决 然汇报)
    T Of course when we have problems we can call the community service center Also there are many other ways to solve the problems For example The old bike doesn’t work and it’s not worth mending so we can buy a new one Now make a survey about the ways you can use when something is broken Complete the table and then report to the class
    Name
    Something wrong
    Way


    get help from the community service center


    do it by oneself


    throw away


    ask sb for help



    (选择名学生汇报调查方法)
    T Who wants to tell us the result of your survey
    S1 I want
    T OK very good You can begin
    S1 Linda’s kitchen fan doesn’t work so she gets help from the community service center Sally’s bike doesn’t work and she repairs it by herself

    2 (先介绍社区然假设新社区负责说说会开设什新服务什?培养学生责感服务意识)
    T Please introduce your community at first Then imagine you were the new manager and tell us what more services you will provide Why
    3 (家庭作业)
    (学生调查区社区服务中心够提供帮助样获帮助等)
    T Please survey your community service center What can they do for you How do you get help from them
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    电话语
    电话语中this表示 that表示:Who’s that This is Michael现代电话语中 常this指方 表示亲切:Who’s this 谁?



    Unit 6 Our Local Area
    Topic 2 My home is in an apartment building
    Section D
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn the vowels
    ((( (( (
    2 Learn some new words
    move countryside city traffic cost miss fresh town
    3 Review the structure ofThere be
    4 Review how to talk about living environments
    5 Let the students learn how to deal with things in study and daily life
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机黑板图片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间6分钟)
    通复 引入2a
    1 (出示两张图片)
    A B





    (学生there be…结构描述图片)
    T Please describe the two pictures using the structure there be…
    (师生图话复重句型引出2a中生词呈现黑板)
    T Now let’s talk about the pictures What’s the differences between the two pictures in the sky
    Ss There are no birds in Picture A but there are many in Picture B
    T What are the birds doing in the sky
    Ss They are flyingsinging
    T You’re right We can say There are many birds flyingsinging in the sky in Picture B It’s clear that Picture A shows something about cities and Picture B is about countryside Who can tell us something more about cities
    S1 There are many people and tall buildings
    T Good Anything else
    S2 There are many buses and cars on the road
    T Yes So we can say The traffic is heavy Are the cities quiet
    Ss No
    T Right They aren’t quiet They are noisy And the cost of living is high But some people want to move from countryside to cities to find work The Greens don’t like living in the city so they want to rent their house with two bedrooms to others Please help them write an ad
    (板书生词求学生掌握city traffic cost move 理解noisy 解countryside)
    city countryside traffic noisy cost move
    2 (复广告表达)
    (分钟)
    T Great Next I’ll ask several students to report their ads and let’s see whose is the best
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间12分钟)
    呈现2a1
    T Do you want to know why so many people are moving from countryside to cities
    1 (1)(学生快速阅读2a短文完成判断正误题核答案)
    T Skim the passage in 2a and finish the exercises below(两分钟)
    T Let’s check the answers together
    (2)(学生次阅读短文找出短文中描述城市农村关键词)
    T Read the passage again and find out the key words to describe the cities and countryside
    (板书)
    noisy
    heavy traffic
    city high cost of living countryside
    the fresh air and the quiet life
    a big yard
    (3)(匹配板书相应项目)
    T Match the descriptive words with city and countryside
    2 (引出1)
    (1)(学生声朗读zoosoon想想学词中oo发音相)
    T Read zoo and soon aloud for three times pay attention to the pronunciation of the letters oo and then write out some more similar words
    (分钟)
    T Ready Can we share your answers S3
    S3 Certainly School afternoon cool food…
    (板书画线oo求学生找规律)
    zoo soon school afternoon food
    T You’re great The oo in them are all pronounced (( In a general way when oo are before voiced consonants or there is nothing after them they are usually pronounced (( such as cool too room
    (2)(样方法引出( (( ()
    T Now let’s find out their friends in 1(渡语)
    ( look took good
    (( round sound about
    ( country couple
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固12a
    1 (学生听1录音 然读)
    T Listen to 1 and read after it
    2 (1)(学生听2a录音 课文 黑板关键词图片 加深印象)
    T Listen to 2a Close your books and look at the key words and pictures on the blackboard
    (2)(学生利关键词造句)
    T OK please make sentences with the key words on the blackboard
    (3)(求学生利短文图片关键词复述短文)
    T Yeah I think the most exciting time is coming Who can have a try to retell the passage according to the key words and pictures Any volunteers
    (4)(引导学生利表信息联系实际生活结合2a完成2b写作务)

    reasons to live
    countryside
    hills and rivers
    green trees and grass
    clean air and water
    houses with a big yard
    city
    supermarket
    easy to find shop
    interesting places to enjoy oneself
    many kinds of traffic ways

    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间7分钟)
    练3 完成4a 4b
    1 (1)(学生听录音完成3核答案)
    T From 2a we have learned many people are moving from countryside to cities to find work Now let’s listen to 3 and finish it
    (2)(学生听遍 尝试复述听句子)
    T Listen to 3 again Try to retell some sentences one by one Come on Boys and girls
    2 (黑板呈现关There be句型练 求学生完成 然纳总结There be句型法)
    T In this topic we must master the structure of There be Now please look at the small blackboard Let’s do some exercises about this structure And then sum up its usage
    Example
    There (be) a computer in my study
    There (be) a lamp a mirror a recorder and some books on the desk
    There (be) a guitar beside it
    There (be) some books on the bookcase
    There (be) a lot of tall buildings
    There (be) many shops a hospital and a school close to the buildings
    There (be) no houses on the right
    There (be) something wrong with my kitchen fan
    There (be) some bread on the plate
    There (be) many old people living there
    3 (完成4a 4b容 总结纳话题语法短语)
    T Look at 4a and 4b please They are very important to you You should read them carefully and try to remember them Understand
    (学生阅读 教师巡视予必帮助)
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间15分钟)
    通活动 培养学生综合运力
    1 (假设某学生家电视机出问题 需求助社区服务中心 学生两组编话 然选组学生台表演)
    T Suppose there is something wrong with your TV set and you want to get help from the community service center Please make a dialog about it with your partner Are you ready Begin
    2 (假放学回家时发现洗手间面许水第反应什?班学做项调查结果ABCD四种答案例图示请组形式讨出选择种什?培养学生分析问题处理问题力)
    T What will you do first if you find some water on the floor in your washroom when getting home We’ve made a survey about it in a class They gave us four different kinds of answers as the diagram shows below Please discuss in groups and then tell the class your choice and the reason

    A to call parents
    B to wait for parents coming back
    C to call the community service center
    D to check the tap or pipe(水龙头水)

    3 (家庭作业:)
    (1)(收集关种房间家具名称单词填表)
    T Collect the words of the names of rooms and furniture then complete the table
    Room
    bedroom
    study

    Furniture
    bed
    chair

    (2) T Discuss and plan your ideal home and then draw a picture of it















    Unit 6 Our Local Area
    Topic 3 How can I get to the library
    Section A
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words
    bridge along turn across meter
    2 Learn the phrasal prepositions
    on the corner of across from betweenand
    3 (1)Learn how to ask the way
    Excuse me is there a bank near here
    Excuse me how can I get to the bookstore
    Excuse me which is the way to the post office
    (2)Learn how to give directions
    Go up this street to the end and you’ll find it on your left
    Go along Xinhua Street and turn left at the first crossing
    Go across the bridge
    It’s about one hundred meters along on the right
    法制教育:
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机挂图球简单图校面图
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间10分钟)
    通复 引出课重点短语句子
    1 (着球 放位置 通师生互动 复学介词介词短语)
    T What’s thisSs It’s a ball
    T Where is the ballSs It’s under the table
    T Where is the ballSs It’s behind the door

    (学生表现予肯定表扬 时变化位置关系 导出新短语介词)
    (板书解释)
    on the corner of across from between…and…
    T Is the ball next to the boxSs Yes it is…
    T Is the teachers’ office on the corner of the Central RoadSs Yes it is
    T Is it across from that English bookSs Yes it is
    T Is the desk between S1 and S2Ss Yes it is
    (学生两组练巩固短语介词 名学生东西放位置 名学生进行描述 然交换角色)
    2 (1) (单词竞赛学生组单位 通赛形式 回顾总结已学点名词 写出优胜者)
    T Boys and girls let’s have a word competition in groups The group that writes the most nouns of places is the winner
    Example
    G1 Bank post office bus station bookstore …
    G2 … …
    (2)(指着3图 呈现新点名词学生适短语介词描述具体位置)
    (板书)
    Tsinghua University Peking University Ren’ai Education Institute Haidian Theater
    T Where is Ren’ai Education Institute
    Ss It’s next to Bayi School

    3 (呈现幅简单图 学生掌握短语)
    Example

    (通短语熟悉操练初步解祈句 步听力扫清障碍 学生更掌握1a做铺垫)
    (板书)
    go along turn right
    Go up this street to the end on the rightleft
    at the third street Go across the bridge
    T Excuse me how can I get to the bookstore
    Ss Go along Suzhou Street to the end and you’ll see it
    T Excuse me which is the way to the post office
    Ss Sorry I don’t know I’m new here
    T Thank you all the same

    (利图种问路方式进行操练 然渡步)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间8分钟)
    呈现1a
    1 (设置板书听力务 学生带着务听1a录音)
    (1) Is there a bank near here
    (2) How can we get to the bookstore
    2 (学生听1a录音 回答问题核答案)
    T Listen to 1a answer the questions and then check the answers
    3 (学生思考总结问路方式然老师进行点评板书)
    (板书)
    Excuse me is there a bank near here
    Excuse me how can I get to the bookstore
    Excuse me which is the way to the post office
    4 (关键词短语写黑板 呈现1a 步学生话基础)
    (1) go up—end—left
    (2) go along—turn left—first crossing—go across—one hundred meters—right
    (3) new—all the same
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    巩固1a
    1 (放1a录音 学生读 铅笔标出重读语调)
    T Follow the tape and mark the stress and intonation with your pencil
    2 (学生擦标重读语调 先读 然着录音起读逐句核语音语调)
    T Erase your marks First read it by yourselves then follow the tape and check your pronunciation and intonation sentence by sentence Go
    3 (机话)
    T Suppose you are AB listen to the tape and make a dialog with BA
    4 (学生合书 根黑板1a关键词短语 两组表演1a)
    T Work in pairs Close your books Look at the key words and phrases on the blackboard and act out the dialog
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间7分钟)
    通练呈现3完成1b 2a2b
    1 (1)(学生阅读1b中A部分指路语选出正确图画然核答案完成1b中A部分)
    T Please read the instructions in 1b and choose the correct pictures Then check the answers
    (2)(学生出示1a图片 利1a中问路指路句型 完成1b中B部分)
    T Boys and girls please look at the picture in 1a If you are standing at A How can you get to the school
    Ss
    2 (学生图 快速说出短语介词 完成2a)
    T Look at the maps and tell me the prepositions as quickly as you can
    3 (学生根2a图片填空然师生起核答案完成2b)
    T Fill in the blanks according to the maps and then check the answers together
    4 (呈现3图 根图 布置教室学生分成4组 组选定名组长 组长担警察 余学生扮成夏令营成员 警察问路 警察指路表现学 教师予表扬)
    Example
    S1 Excuse me which is the way to the supermarket
    S2 Go along the street turn left at Zhongguancun Street Then go up that street and turn left at the second crossing You can see
    (通次活动 学生掌握问路指路基句型 加强语言实践 激发学生学英语兴趣 提高英语交际力 培养帮助意识)
    法制教育:


    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通活动 培养学生实际运语言力
    1 (呈现校面图 求学生利学介词短语问路句型 熟悉校园环境更加热爱校园)
    Example
    (1) S3 Where is …
    S4 It’s …
    (2) S5 Excuse me Is there a …
    S6 Yes there is
    S5 How can I get to …
    S6 Go along …
    (3) S7 Excuse me which is the way to …
    S8 Sorry I don’t know
    S7 Thank you all the same
    2 (设计道听力题 学生根听容画图 谁短时间里画出准确路线图 予奖励)
    T Listen and draw the route as quickly as you can
    Example
    I know you are arriving next Sunday Let me tell you the way to my house Take a taxi from the airport Pass a bank on your right and then go down Long Street Go through Six Avenue and Seven Avenue When you see a big supermarket turn left Then go down Bridge Street and turn left at New Park Go down Center Street and my house is on your right
    (提高听力力动手实践力 培养竞争意识)
    3 (家庭作业)
    (1)(学生练Section A 3 根图编话)
    (2)(预Section B注意搜集整理关交通设施交通标志方面信息)






















    Unit 6 Our Local Area
    Topic 3 How can I get to the library
    SectionB
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1(1)Learn the words and expressions about transport facilities and the traffic signs
    sidewalk public phone traffic lights crosswalk Turn left No right turn No left turn Turn right Go straight No parking No Uturn Parking Danger
    (2)Learn other new words
    until kilometer should change
    2(1)Go on learning how to ask the way
    Excuse me could you tell me the way to Dinghao Building
    Excuse me where is Anli Road
    (2)Go on learning how to give directions
    Go along this road until you get to Beisihuan Road
    Turn left and walk on
    It’s about 15 kilometers away from here
    First you need to take Bus No 718 then you should change to the No 108 bus at
    Anzhen Bridge
    3Learn to help others
    法制教育:


    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机挂图画图
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    通复导入1a
    1 (师生起唱歌谣 激发学生学兴趣 活跃课堂气氛完成4)
    T Let’s chant together
    Stop look and listen
    Before you cross the street
    Use your eyes use your ears
    Before you use your feet
    2 (呈现Section A 3图学生结活动复关问路句型)
    T Look at the map Suppose you are standing at the train station please make a dialog with your partner about how to get to Tsinghua University Then change your roles Ready Go
    (学生体验合作学乐趣)
    T OK Stop Which pair wants to show us your dialog
    (学生结活动进行点评总结学关问路句型完成节课布置家庭作业)
    Excuse me could you tell me the way to
    Excuse me where is
    (然导出新问路句型)
    (板书)
    3 (1)(假设师生校园里遇见 S1问教师图书馆 教师予回答 导出新指路句型)
    S1 I’m looking for our library Where is it
    T Go along this road turn left and walk on You can’t miss it
    (板书画线部分)
    You can’t miss it
    (2)(假设校园角 S2问教师宿舍 教师予回答 导出新指路句型)
    S2 Could you tell me the way to the dormitory
    T Go along this road until you get to the gym and you’ll see it on your right It’s about 500 meters away from here
    (学生熟悉新句型回答形式 第二步听力操练基础)
    4 (呈现方位图 教师根实际发挥)
    Example



    T You are at Fuzhou Train Station now If someone asks how to get to Qingkou you can say
    It’s about 30 kilometers away from here You need to take Bus No 51 and then change to the No 30 bus at Taijiang It will take you there
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    呈现1a
    1 (设置听力务先听第段话找出问题(1)答案听第二段话找出问题(2)答案学生带着务听录音降低难度)
    T Listen to 1a and answer the following questions
    (板书)
    (1) How to get to Dinghao Building
    (2) At which bus stop can you change to the No108 bus
    2 (学生听1a录音找出关键词短语回答问题然师生起核答案)
    T Listen to the tape to find out the key words and phrases and answer the questions according to the key words and phrases Then check the answers together
    (板书)
    go along until turn left miss
    kilometers need to take should change to

    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    巩固1a
    1 (放1a录音 学生读 铅笔标出重读语调)
    T Follow the tape and mark the stress and intonation with your pencil
    2 (学生擦标重读语调 先读 然录音起读 逐句核语音语调样学生集中注意力 效率更高)
    T Erase your marks now First read by yourselves and then check your pronunciation and intonation sentence by sentence according to the tape Go
    3 (机话)
    T Suppose you are AB Listen to the tape and make a dialog with BA
    4 (学生两组 黑板关键词短语话)
    T Work in pairs Close your books look at the key words on the blackboard and act out the dialog
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    练1b 1c 2 3
    1 (1)(呈现1b图 学生完成1b)
    T Listen and complete 1b Next we will check the answers together And then read it by yourselves
    (2)(求学生表演1b)
    T Let’s act it out now Who wants to try
    (3)(求学生桌合作完成1c)
    T Ask the way and give directions to familiar places with your partner
    2 (呈现2图片 引出交通设施名称 学生拓展设施名称 增词汇量完成
    2)
    T Look at the pictures What do they mean
    (导出 sidewalk public phone traffic lights crosswalk)
    T Anything else
    Ss Bus station
    3 (呈现交通标志图 学生初步认识标志 步作铺垫)




    T Look at the pictures What do they mean
    (导出 Turn left Go straight Turn right)
    4 (学生分钟时间3中交通标志图 通讨 解含义 学生补充交通标志 老师纳总结)
    Keep away 请勿
    Keep right 请右行
    Oneway traffic 单行道
    Danger ahead 前面危险
    Drive slowly 车辆慢行
    Slow down look around and cross 慢二三通
    T Now I’ll give you some minutes to look at the traffic signs in 3 When you see these signs
    what will you do
    Example
    When we see Parking we can park the cars there
    (板书补充容)
    法制教育:


    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通实践活动 培养学生实际操作力
    1 (组活动全班分成四组组名学生张示意图教师组提供段指引路线文字组名学生读文字 学生画路线图组成员间交换路线图 推选出标准幅图交老师老师总结情况 组予表扬)
    T Boys and girls here are four passages They tell us the ways to some different houses I’ll give each group one passage One of the group members reads the passage and the others try to draw the maps
    (材料)
    (1) Find Wang Xue’s house Go along Buxing Street and take the first turning on the right It’s on the left across from the museum
    (2) Find Wei Ming’s house Go along Lanhou Street to the traffic lights and turn right Go along the road and take the second turning on the left Wei Ming’s house is on the left next to the post office
    (3) Find Chen Hui’s house Go along Chang’an Street and take the first turning on the right and go a bit further Then take the first turning on the left Chen Hui’s house is next to the supermarket
    (4) Find Ke Lin’s house Go down Chang’an Street to the end Turn left When you see the bank turn left again It’s the house behind the bank









    A Wang Xue’s house B Wei Ming’s house
    C Chen Hui’s house D Ke Lin’s house
    2 (做义务指路员)
    T Boys and girls look at your guide book Could you please tell your partner the way to a building
    3 (家庭作业)
    (学生图示 假现博物馆银行间 想剧院 该走 请编段话)









    T Suppose you are standing between the museum and the bank If you want to go to the theater how can you get there Make a dialog


    Unit 6 Our Local Area
    Topic 3 How can I get to the library
    Section C
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    safe hurt lose accident rule before cross third last ticket speed fast when wait for careful be late for
    2 Learn the imperative sentences
    Turn right
    Be careful
    Don’t be late for school
    3 Talk about traffic rules and strengthen the consciousness of keeping safe on the roads
    Before we cross the road we must stop and look both ways
    Wait for your turn when the lights are red
    Don’t play on the street
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机制卡片图片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学法

    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间7分钟)
    通复 引入1a
    (检查点评家庭作业承启学节课奠定基础)
    1 (师生唱歌曲 激发学生学兴趣 活跃课堂气氛 完成5)
    T Sing this song Traffic Lights together
    2 (句型竞赛求全体学2分钟默写关问路句型时中挑选两名学讲台选出获胜者)
    T Please write down the sentence patterns about asking the way in two minutes At the same time I’ll choose two of you to come to the front The student who writes best will be the winner Are you ready Go
    Example
    Excuse me is there a(an)… near here
    Excuse me how can I get to
    Excuse me which is the way to…
    Excuse me could you tell me the way to
    Excuse me where is…

    3 (学生分成组教室图 横排Street 1 Street 2 Street 3……竖排Road 1 Road 2 Road 3……出具体路线说明 求组根指令完成务)
    T Now suppose our classroom is a map Rows are streets and lines are roads Row 1 is Street 1 Line 1 is Road 1 I’ll give you some instructions You should find out who you will meet according to my instructions
    Example
    T Go along Road 1 until you get to Street 2 then turn left and walk on It’s on your right
    S2 I meet sb
    T First turn right and go to Road 3 Then walk on and turn left Go down until you come to Street 2 It’s on your left
    S2 I meet sb

    4 (呈现制卡片 复交通标志图 导出新目标语言)
    Example
    T What’s this
    Ss It’s a traffic sign
    T What does it mean
    Ss It means that we can’t drive too fast
    T If we do that what will we get
    Ss We’ll get a ticket for speeding So we must obey the traffic rules

    (板书画线部分)
    get a ticket for speeding obey the traffic rules
    (提出问题:果遵守交通规 交警会做呈现2中图片 学生解中含义)
    T If we don’t obey the traffic rules what will the police do Look at the pictures and answer the question
    Ss They will give us a ticket a ticket for speeding a ticket for drinkdriving a ticket for parking in the wrong place a ticket for making a wrong turn
    T Well done Now please finish 2 Then check the answers
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    呈现1a
    1 (呈现制七幅图片 利图片 通师生互动 导出幅图体现新目标语言 图片容展示)
    (图 ) (图二 )




    (图三 ) (图四 )





    (图五 ) (图六 )





    (着图 引导学生学新目标语言)
    Example
    T What’s this
    Ss It’s a car
    T What’s that
    Ss It’s a street light
    T What happens in this picture
    Ss A car drives too fast and hits a street light
    T We know it’s a traffic accident The man in the car gets hurt
    (呈现图二 图三)
    T What happens in Picture 2 and 3
    Ss Traffic accidents
    T Yes And the men died in the accidents So it’s good to wait for your turn when the lights are red You see every year many people get hurt or die in accidents But how can we keep safe
    (板书画线部分)
    fast a traffic accident got hurt wait for when
    (学生发挥想象 讨 然逐呈现图四 图五 图六 图七 引出新目标语言)
    (教师根学生中英文描述进行总结 板书)
    T OK Look at the pictures together What should we do to make the roads safe
    We must cross the street only when we see the greenwalksign
    We must stop and look both ways before we cross the road
    We must never play on the street
    It’s good to help children and old people cross the road
    We must obey the traffic rules
    (通七幅图呈现讨描述 学生更直观 更形象理解情景掌握目标语言 步课文阅读作铺垫)
    2 (设置阅读务 学生带着务阅读1a完成1b问题)
    T Read the passage in 1a and then mark these statements True (T) or False (F) in 1b And then check the answers together
    3 (答案核结束 求学生朗读1a找出段文章理解处)
    T Well done Boys and girls do you have any questions about 1a If you have please tell me Let’s solve them together
    4 (学生阅读找出中未解决难点 教师难点重点呈现黑板 进行环节做准备)
    (板书)
    lose one’s life keep safe first must obey the traffic rules green walk sign second cross both ways third never play last it’s good to do…
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间8分钟)
    巩固1a
    1 (学生次阅读1a文章 注意黑板呈现关键词词组句型)
    T Read the text again and pay attention to the key words phrases and structures
    2 (放1a录音 学生读 注意语音语调)
    T Follow the tape and pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation
    3 (学生根黑板图片关键词复述课文)
    T Now I think you can retell the text using the pictures and key words on the blackboard OK Who can have a try
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    练3完成4
    1 T OK Boys and girls you did very well But please be quiet Be quiet Don’t talk Listen to me carefully
    (板书呈现Be quiet Don’t talk引出祈句 鼓励引导学生说祈句)
    Be quiet
    Don’t talk
    Example
    Open the door
    Be careful
    Look at the blackboard please
    Don’t eat in the classroom
    Don’t be late for school
    (板书)
    Be careful
    Don’t be late for school
    (教师指导学生纳总结祈句表达方式 环节作铺垫)
    2 (1)(呈现3图片 求学生说出该图表示交通规然选择正确选项 学说快)
    T Please look at these pictures and tell us some traffic rules Then match the rules with the pictures You can do it like this
    Don’t park here
    Are you clear Let’s begin
    (2)(求学生写出更交通规学写快)
    T Would you like to write some more traffic rules Do it as quickly as you can
    3 (知道?)
    T What are the rules in our school Let’s make a survey today and take some notes
    Name Li Ming
    Activity
    Can
    Can’t
    Listen to music in the classroom


    Eat in the classroom


    Wear a hat in class


    4 (学生四组讨学校规章制度 完成4)
    T Talk about the rules in our school and write some more school rules Then report them to the class
    Example
    G1 Keep quiet in class
    G2 Don’t be late for school

    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通活动 培养学生动手力 展示学生性
    1 (学生做份调查表教师全班分四组 讨该遵守交通规)
    T Now please make a survey The whole class will be divided into four groups The topic is How to obey the traffic rulesThen fill in the blanks and make a report

    Group 1

    1
    2
    3

    Group 2

    1
    2
    3

    Group 3

    1
    2
    3

    Group 4

    1
    2
    3
    2 (做校园文化建设通项活动激发学生动探究知识欲 培养学生动手力 展示学生性)
    T There are some signs in English in our school because it’s very necessary for us to use
    English in our daily life What other places do you think need English signs and rules on
    campus Let’s work out together
    Example
    (1) Keep quiet
    (2) Clean the classroom every day
    (3) Wear sports shoes for gym class
    (4) …
    3 (家庭作业)
    (学生搜集年种交通事统计数字 思考问题 什会种现象?避免?然写成短文)
    T Collect the total number of the traffic accidents last year Then think about the question Why do we have this phenomenon and how to avoid it Then write a passage about it









    Unit 6 Our Local Area
    Topic 3 How can I get to the library
    Section D
    Section D
    Section D needs 1 period Section D 需1课时
    The main activities are 1 2 and 5 课重点活动1 25
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn the vowels
    (( ( ( ((
    2 Learn the new word down
    3 Review the imperative sentences
    4 Review how to ask the way and give directions
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机挂图单词卡片音标卡片北京交通图(交通图)
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间10分钟)
    复话题单词句型
    1 (单词竞赛话题单词功类 制成单词卡片老师出汉语 学生说出英语意思
    T Now let’s have a word competition I’ll give you the Chinese meanings Please say them in English You’ll get one point for each word OK Ready Go

    2 (组活动全班分成组 求组名成员黑板前 教师出1分钟 写出学介词短语介词 教师讲评 1单词加1分完成4a介词部分复巩固)
    T Now Let’s go on with another competition I’ll ask one student in each group to come here and write down the prepositions or phrasal prepositions you have learnt Each of you has only one minute Are you ready Go
    3 (组活动全班分四组求组名成员黑板画出学校路线 求组两位学话题学问路句型表演话)
    T Great Just now you did a good job I’ll ask one student in each group to draw a route from his home to our school on the blackboard Another two in each group will act out the dialog about how they come to school according to the route
    4 (练校规交通规 完成4a 4b)
    (1)(方案 组活动全班分成四组求组学生两分钟说出学祈句 句2分)
    T Now The class will be divided into four groups I’ll give you two minutes Please say the imperative sentences as many as you can One sentence two points
    (方案二 谁优胜者学生组单位 通赛形式总结课已学关校规交通规祈句说出写出组获胜者)
    T Group 1 writes school rules Group 2 writes traffic rules Let’s begin
    Example
    G1 Keep quiet in class

    G2 Don’t play on the street

    (2)(学生朗读4a4b掌握法)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间5分钟)
    呈现1
    1 (呈现单词卡片brown flower cow 求学生找出规律出相发音((出示音标卡片((齐读)
    T Look at these words What will you find out … Right They all include the sound (( Let’s read it together
    (板书)
    brown flower cow ((
    (样方法导出(( (( (()
    2 (学生齐读黑板呈现音标单词)
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    巩固1完成2
    1 (听1录音求学生试着独立写出听单词词加1分)
    T Now listen to 1 Write down the words you’ve heard by yourselves One word one point
    2 (求学生找出含(( ( ( ((单词)
    T Let’s sum up the words that have the pronunciations (( ( ( ((
    3 (学生仔细听2录音填空教师核答案然学生进行结活动发现难点)
    T Now listen to 2 carefully and fill in the blanks And then check the answers Then work in pairs to find difficulties in it
    (板书难点)
    Go down this road
    4 (学生听遍求4名学生黑板画出正确路线图)
    T Listen again I’ll ask four students to draw the correct maps on the blackboard
    5 (学生针黑板正确路线图复述课文容)
    T Good Next who can retell the dialog using the correct maps on the blackboard
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    组活动完成3
    (学生画出家学校路线图学生分成四组组选择份优秀路线图画黑板组学描述该学路线情况组代表全班学报告)
    T Now The class will be divided into four groups Please draw the route from your home to school I’ll ask one student who draws the best in each group to draw his own route on the blackboard Others in the group try to describe how the student goes to school Then report to class
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通活动 培养学生综合运力
    1 (方案组活动全班分成六组学生图 6方意放ABCDEF中 然求出走路线完成5)






    T Look at the map Put the following six places on A B C D E or F as you like
    post office supermarket
    bookstore hospital
    bank school
    T Ask the following ways
    (1) from A to D
    (2) from B to E
    (3) from C to F
    (4) fromto

    (方案二 组活动 完成5老师黑板画出面图全班学生分成4组S1 6名post office supermarket bookstore hospital bank school写ABCDEF意位置S2 S3 编段关问路指路话S4根话容彩笔画出路线活动全班学生参表现组 老师予奖励)




    T Boys and girls please look at the plan on the blackboard I’ll divide the class into four groups In each group S1 puts the six places on ABCDE or F as heshe likes S2 and S3 make a dialog about asking the way and giving directions S4 draws the route according to the dialog Now let’s begin
    (组务 求学生讨 写 然全班汇报 展示作品教师表现分数)
    2 (弹性课堂组学生张北京交通图 假设名学生现海淀桥 达长城?学生4组讨 制订路线图 附说明 然选出代表讲台作报告)
    T Suppose you are at Haidian Bridge now and you would go to the Great Wall Here’s the map of Beijing Please discuss in groups of four then write a passage and at last report to the whole class
    (该活动换交通图制定某处某路线图)
    3 (家庭作业)
    (求学生课设计教室学校规)
    T Make some more rules in your class or school using the imperative sentences





    Unit 7 The Birthday Party
    Topic 1 When is your birthday?
    Section A
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 (1) Learn the names of months
    January February March April May June July August September October
    November December
    (2) Learn to read the years in English
    (3) Learn some other new words and phrases
    was be born were alone thousand sport
    2 Learn the past simple tense with waswere
    (1)When was he born do you know He was born in June 1985
    (2)Where was he born In Maryland the USA
    (3)When were you born I was born in January 1997
    3 Talk about months and years
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    身份卡片课图片录音机日历表
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间3分钟)
    解决生词birthday
    1 (老师课前调查否学生生日果没Kangkang生日例师生唱Happy Birthday首歌 引出生词birthday)
    T Let’s sing Happy Birthday together
    (师生唱Happy Birthday)
    T Do you know why we sing Happy Birthday Because next Thursday is Kangkang’s birthday
    birthday生日
    (板书)
    T We should sayHappy birthday to you Kangkang
    (引入课标题板书)
    2 (呈现日历引出月份表达法)
    T Please look at the calendar How many days are there in a week
    Ss Seven
    T How many days are there in February
    Ss There are 28 or 29 days
    T Good How many months are there in a year
    Ss Twelve
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间18分钟)
    教师准备幅12月份日历呈现学生 教授月份年份呈现1b3a
    T Which month is your birthday in Do you know what it is in English
    1 (板书讲授月份 学生读)
    January February March April
    May June July August
    September October November December
    (教师求学生特注意易混淆JanuaryFebruary JuneJuly Septem
    (老师举例说明年份表达法学生读呈现3a)
    Name Li Ming
    Age 33
    I was born in Fujian in August 1978
    3 (讲完月份年份 教师回生日话题教师出示身份卡片 引出出生表达法be born 板书)
    Example
    T My name is Li Ming I am thirtythree years old I was born in August 1978 I was born in Fujian ××× and we were born in different places
    be born was (amis) were(are)
    (教师四名学生根身份卡片做问答练)
    T What’s my nameS1 Your name is Li Ming
    T How old am IS2 You are thirtythree
    T When was I bornS3 You were born in August 1978
    T Where was I bornS4 You were born in Fujian
    4 (学生出示课前准备身份卡片 两话)
    T Show the card to your partner Then practice the dialog in pairs like this
    (教师名学生作示范)
    T What’s your nameS My name is…
    T When were you bornS I was born in…
    T Where were you bornS I was born in…
    T Were you born in…S Yes I was No I wasn’t …
    5 (呈现1a 回答问题讲解含般时句子)
    (1)(设置板书听力务学生带着务听1a录音)
    T Have you ever heard of Phelps Yes he is a very popular sports star He got 8 gold medals in the 2008 Olympic Games and he is calledFlying Fish Do you want to know more about him Listen to 1a and then answer the questions
    (1) When was Phelps born
    (2) Where was he born
    (2)(听完录音回答问题然师生起核答案)
    WhenWhere was Phelps born
    …be born in…
    June 1985 Maryland the USA
    (3)(板书关键词 呈现1a讲解该部分)
    (4)(总结系动词be般时句型中be正确形式)
    (板书)
    am is→was are→were
    I was born in 1985
    Were you born in 1985
    Yes I was No I wasn’t
    When was he born
    He was born in 1985

    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固1a朗读表演1a话根身情况问答完成1c
    1 (放1a录音 学生读 铅笔标出重读语调)
    T Listen to the tape carefully and mark the stress and intonation with your pencil
    2 (学生齐读 然录音起读 逐句核语音语调)
    T Read aloud together then follow the tape and check your pronunciation and intonation sentence by sentence Go
    3 (机话)
    T Suppose you are Kangkang Listen to the tape again and make a dialog with Michael
    4 (根第二步呈现黑板关键词 两组表演1a)
    T Close your books look at the blackboard and act out the dialog in 1a
    5 (完成1c)
    T Now please talk with your partner about when and where you were born
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间12分钟)
    通练进步掌握含年月表达法
    1 (学生听磁带1b2读注意单词重音句子重音)
    T Let’s listen to 1b and 2 pay attention to the stress of words and sentences
    alone
    (板书教授alone)
    2 (阅读3a 学生朗读然写年份英语表达方式)
    T From 1b we know the twelve months and their short forms From 2 we can remember how many days there are in each month easily 3a tells us how to say years in English Let’s go to 3a read and write First let’s read these years
    Ss …
    T OK Now please say and write down these years in English in 2 of 3a by yourselves
    (学生写完 两互答案)
    3 (学生听磁带完成3b教师学生介绍图片物)
    T Listen to the tape and finish 3b Then we’ll check the answers and know more about these people
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间7分钟)
    练日期表达法 增强实践活动力
    1 (1)(搜集家出生年月出生)
    Name
    Month of birth
    Year of birth
    Birthplace
















    (2)(学生写篇关家庭短文介绍年龄出生年月出生等情况)
    Example
    My father’s name is Wang Chunlai He is 40 years old He was born in February 1970 My mother’s name is Bao Chunhua She is 39 years old She was born in Guangxi in November 1971 I was born in May 1995 My grandparents live with us They were born in the old days Their lives were very hard in the past but they are very good now We live happily together I love my family very much
    2 (家庭作业)
    (1)(调查学出生年月出生汇总全班作汇报)
    Survey your classmates and find out whenwhere they were born
    Sum up the number of your classmates who were born in each month and report it to your class
    (2)(复基数词预序数词)
    Review the Cardinal Numbers and preview the Ordinal Numbers after class
    Unit 7 The Birthday Party
    Topic 1 When is your birthday?
    Section B
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 (1)Learn some ordinal numbers
    fourth fifth sixth seventh eighth ninth tenth eleventh twelfth thirteenth twentieth
    (2)Learn some other new words
    birthday date plan celebrate party
    2 Learn how to read and write the dates
    Jan 1st (January first)

    Dec 12th (December twelfth)
    3 Talk about the dates
    What’s the date today It’s May 8th
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    数字卡片黑板数词挂图幻灯片课图片录音机日历表
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    检查家庭作业复月份年份表达法1~100基数词
    1 (出示日历表复月份年份表达法)
    T WhenWhere were you born
    Ss …
    2 (学生做接龙游戏 说出1~100基数词)
    T Let’s play a number game Please say the numbers from one to one hundred OK (教师指着第排第学生说) Start
    (老师序指着学生说:You say one you say two you say three … Let’s count up to one hundred)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    呈现12a学序数词
    1 (1)(复数字卡片呈现基数词序数词 创设直观情景)
    (先复first法)
    T Today we’ll continually learn Topic 1 of Unit 7 It’s the first topic in Unit 7 Topic 2 is the second topic in Unit 7 And Topic 3 is the third topic in Unit 7
    (教师说明one→first two→second three→third法板书)
    one—first1st two—second2nd three—third3rd
    (2)(教师出示写100基数词序数词黑板数字挂图幻灯片播放录音求学生边听边注意较基数词序数词异呈现2a)
    T Now listen to 2a and compare the cardinal numbers and the ordinal numbers
    (3)(找四学生黑板写特殊变化序数词)
    T Please try to find out at least eight special ordinal numbers and the rules of ordinal numbers
    (教师总结板书)
    one→first two→second three→third 第二三单独记
    eight→eighth nine→ninth 八九少t e
    five→fifth twelve→twelfth 五十二变ve
    twenty→twentieth thirty→thirtieth 十改yie
    twentyone→twentyfirst thirtyfour→thirtyfourth 二十末位序
    (老师补充条基数词变序数词记忆口诀:
    基变序规律词尾加th二三特殊记结尾字母t d d八减t九减eveftyy变i记住th前e遇十变位)
    (4)(学生分组进行链式操练)
    T Now let’s practice the ordinal numbers in a chain
    S1 First
    S2 Second
    S3 Third
    S4 Fourth
    S5 Fifth

    (5)(数字游戏:准备基数词序数词英文单词卡片干 乱序发学生 学生快速度应序排队 快速报数)
    ①S6 One ②S9 First
    S7 Two S10 Second
    S8 Three S11 Third



    2 (复生日表达法引出庆祝活动)
    T Next Saturday is my birthday My friends plan to have a party to celebrate it Would you
    like to come to my party
    Ss Yes I’d love to
    (板书画线部分)
    have a party celebrate
    (问学生)
    T When is your birthday
    S My birthday is
    (学生回答时汉语:10月1日 然教师译成英语板书October first渡步)
    T Just now I said Next Saturday is my birthday But Kangkang’s birthday is May thirteenth Do you want to know how Kangkang plans to celebrate his birthday
    Ss Yes
    T OKLet’s listen to the tape
    (然渡步)
    3 (呈现1 学重点新词句)
    (1)(设置板书听力务学生带着务听1录音)
    T Listen to the tape and answer the questions
    (板书)
    (1) What’s the date today
    (2) How does Kangkang plan to celebrate his birthday
    (3) Who wants to have a birthday party for him
    (2)(听完录音回答问题然师生起核答案)
    May 13th next Thursday
    plan to do
    celebrate
    have a birthday party
    Would you like to…
    (3)(教师板书重点单词短语句型呈现1 讲解该部分)
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固1熟悉重读语调 表演话
    1 (放1录音学生读 铅笔标出重读语调)
    T Follow the tape and mark the stress and intonation with your pencil
    2 (学生擦标重读语调 先读1 然录音起读 逐句核语音语调)
    T Erase the marks First read by yourselves and then check your pronunciation and intonation sentence by sentence according to the tape Go
    3 (根第二步呈现黑板关键词短语句型学生两组表演1)
    T Close your books look at the blackboard and act out 1
    Group 1 …
    Group 2 …

    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间15分钟)
    练2a 2b3 掌握序数词 总结规律 掌握日期表达法
    1 (放2a录音学生读体会序数词重读音节)
    T Follow the tape and pay attention to the stress of the ordinal numbers
    2 (呈现2b图学生英文表达搭配)
    (条件展示相应视频图片 增强学生爱国义意识 提高学兴趣)
    T Let’s look at the pictures Each picture tells us an event Please match the words with the pictures
    5月8日
    3 (1)(呈现3 教师出示张日历表 引导学生写出日期)
    T Look at this we writeMay 8th But we sayMay eighth
    (2)(教师写出日期黑板 学生英语读出 巩固加深学生印象)
    5月4日
    9月10日
    T I’ll ask some students to read these dates Who wants to have a try
    (3)(教师呈现张日历表 学生话)
    T Look at this calendar Answer my questions What day is it
    Ss It’s Friday
    2012年5月
    4日
    星期五
    T What’s the date
    Ss It’s May 4th
    (重复操练日期)
    4 (方案 学生设计信息沟通活动 完成3)
    (出示列表格 学生两组问答 填写表格学生A3中图1图2 学生B图3图4然互相询问方 解4幅图容完成表格)
    T Now work in pairs student A look at Picture 1 and 2 student B look at Picture 3 and 4 Then make dialogs like this and complete the table
    SA When was … born
    SB HeShe was born onin …
    SA Where was heshe born
    SB HeShe was born in …
    Name
    Date of birth
    Birthplace
    Kangkang


    Jane


    Maria


    Michael


    (方案二 老师学生选3幅图片进行话 准说姓名学生听完 抢答说出描述幅图里)
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    联系实际 学生学 提高学兴趣
    1 (制作班级生日册)
    (组活动学生互相询问彼生日 做记录 然汇集成班级生日册程中 练巩固询问生日句型 增进学生间感情)
    Name
    Date of birth
    Birthplace
    Year
    Month
    Date















    T Do you have your English calendar I have got an English calendar Let me tell you when my birthday is My birthday is August 2nd I was born in Fujian Please ask others and fill out the form You may begin like this
    S1 When is your birthday
    S2 My birthday is…
    S1 Where were you born
    S2 I was born in …
    2 (制作节日时间表学生分组伴调查重事件节日日期 制作张时间表)
    T Please survey the dates of some important events or festivals in your group and then make a timetable
    3 (家庭作业)
    (搜集家庭成员出生日期(年月日)点 制作张家庭成员生日表)
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    关生日种表达法:
    My birthday is October tenth
    My birthday is on October tenth
    October tenth is my birthday
    注:序数词前加the(英式)




    Unit 7 The Birthday Party
    Topic 1 When is your birthday?

    Section C
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 (1)Learn some words about the shape
    shape circle square triangle rectangle oval
    (2)Learn some other new words and phrases
    present football
    2 (1)Talk about the shape
    What’s the shape of your present It’s round
    Was it like a flower before No it wasn’t It was like a star
    What shape was it before It was a square
    (2)Talk about the length and width
    How long is it It is 24 centimeters long
    How wide is it It’s 6 4 centimeters wide
    (3) Talk about the usage of objects
    What do we use it for We use it to keep pencils rulers erasers and so on
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    实物课图片录音机
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复序数词 引入新课
    (做游戏)
    (复序数词全班分成两组Group AGroup B Group A名学生先说三基数词 Group B名学生迅速说出相应序数词注意逢带3691316……序数词跳)
    T Now we divide the class into two groups—Group A and Group B The first player from Group A says three cardinal numbers quickly The first player from Group B must say the correct ordinal numbers as quickly as possible accordingly You mustn’t say3rd 6th 9th 13th 16th…
    Example
    SA One two fourSB First second fourth…
    T If the player in Group B is successful Group B gets a point If the player in Group B is not successful Group A gets a point Let’s find which group will be the winner
    Group
    Point
    Group A




    Group B




    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间15分钟)
    呈现练表达形状句型呈现1
    1 (教师出示球 引出表示形状句型生词circle)
    T I have a lot of objects Do you want to have a look at them OK I’ll show them to you
    T What’s this in EnglishS1 It’s a basketball
    T What color is itS1 It’s red
    T What shape is it(教师汉语提示)S1 圆
    T Yes It’s round It’s a circle
    2 (教师出示块三角形蛋糕鸡蛋张长方形硬纸 引出生词triangle oval
    rectangle square)
    (1)(话)
    T What’s this in EnglishSs It’s a cake
    T What shape is itSs 三角形
    T Yeah you are right It’s a triangle
    (2)(话二)
    T What’s thisSs It’s an egg T What shape is itSs 椭圆形
    T Very good It’s an oval
    (3)(话三)
    (教师出示张长方形硬纸 然剪成正方形)
    T What’s thisSs It’s a piece of paper
    T What shape is itSs 正方形
    T Yes it’s a square What shape was it beforeSs 长方形
    T Well done It was a rectangle
    What shape is it It’s round
    It’s aan circle triangle oval square
    What shape was it before
    It was a rectangle
    (板书画线部分)
    3 (教师出示球仪 引出词组be like)
    T What is it like (教师汉语提示)
    Ss 球
    T Yes It is like a ball
    4 (教师出示颗五角星形状纸 然折成朵花形状)
    T What is it likeSs It is like a flower
    T Was it like a flower beforeSs No it wasn’t It was like a star
    What is it like
    It is like a ballflower
    Was it like a flower before
    No it wasn’t It was like a star
    (板书画线部分)
    (学生学品图画桌话 互相提问物体形状)
    Example
    S1 What shape is itS2 It’s round
    S1 What is it likeS2 It is like a ball
    5 (教师出示2a 图片 练be like般现时般时法)
    T Now look at the pictures in 2a Let’s talk about it like this
    T What is it likeS1 It is like a dog
    T Was it like a dog beforeS1 No it wasn’t It was like a hill …
    6 (呈现2b学生两组范例操练完成2b)
    T Well done Now look at the example in 2b and work in pairs
    Example
    S2 What shape is it now
    S3 It’s a circle
    S2 What shape was it before
    S3 It was a square

    T Good job Let’s stop Do you want to know about the present for Kangkang’s birthday Let’s listen to 1a and answer the questions
    (渡步)
    7 (呈现1 听录音回答关问题 掌握话容)
    (1)(设置板书听力务学生听1录音 回答问题)
    T Now listen to the tape and answer the questions on the blackboard
    (1) What’s Maria’s present for Kangkang’s birthday
    (2) What’s the shape of her present
    (3) What color is it
    (4) Can Michael have a look
    (2)(教师核答案板书关键词词组)
    present shape color soccer ball have a look
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固1表演话
    1 (放1录音 学生读 铅笔标出重读语调)
    T Follow the tape and mark the stress and intonation with your pencil
    2 (学生擦标重读语调 先读 然录音起读 逐句核语音语调)
    T Rub them out and read by yourselves Then check your pronunciation and intonation sentence by sentence according to the tape Go
    3 (机话)
    T Suppose you are Maria listen to Michael and make a dialog with him
    (T Now you are Michael listen to Maria and make a dialog with her )
    4 (根第二步呈现黑板关键词词组 学生两组表演1强化学生关物体形状句型记忆)
    T Work in pairs Close your books look at the blackboard and act out the dialog
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    练3 掌握关形状长度宽度等关句型
    1 T Stop here Now look at me
    (做测量黑板动作测定转身)
    It is 3 meters long
    It is 15 meters wide
    Our blackboard is 3 meters long
    It is 15 meters wide
    (板书画线部分简略形式)
    (指着黑板问学生)
    T How long is it
    Ss It is 3 meters long
    How long is it
    How wide is it
    T How wide is it
    Ss It is 15 meters wide
    (板书画线部分)
    2 (教师手里着铅笔盒手放背学生猜引出3)
    T Now please look at me There is a present for you in my hand Can you guess what it is What shape is it
    Ss Is it a circle
    T NoS5 Is it a rectangleT YesS5 How long is it
    T It is 24 centimeters longS5 How wide is it
    T It is 64 centimeters wideS5 What do we use it for
    T We use it to keep pencils rulers erasers and so on
    What do we use it for
    We use it to …
    S5 Oh it must be a pencilbox
    (引出3中重点句型板书核心结构)
    3 (学生两组3中图片 进行话操练)
    T Now please work in pairs and act out the dialog
    4 (组活动:学生4组针周围实物学具进行话 练关形状句型)
    T Good stop here Let’s work in groups of four and talk about the shapes of the things around you Remember to use What shape … How long … How wide …and so on
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通活动 进步巩固关询问形状句型
    1 (猜谜游戏)
    (完成4做面游戏 名学生物品放背 伴猜)
    T Let’s play a game One student holds an object behind hisher back and another student guesses what it is Practice like this
    S1 What shape is it What is it likeS2 It’s aan…
    S1 What color is itS2 It’s…
    S1 How long is itS2 It is…centimeters long
    S1 How wide is itS2 It’s…centimeters wide
    S1 Is it aan…S2 Yes it is No it isn’t
    2 (猜词赛)
    (学生两组 面黑板 背黑板教师黑板写物品名称 面黑板学生描述物品 背黑板学生猜词 规定时间猜中者胜)
    T Work in pairs I’ll write the names of some objects on the blackboard S1 stands with hisher back to the blackboard S2 stands with hisher face to the blackboard and describes the objects until S1 guesses what it is The pair who have the most right guesses in the limited time are the winners
    3 (家庭作业)
    (选择件熟悉物品进行描述少5句子)
    T Describe one of your familiar things with at least 5 sentences
    Example
    I have a desk in my study I want to tell you its shape It is a rectangle It is 100 centimeters long It is 60 centimeters wide I do my homework on the desk every day
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    look likebe like区:
    look like询问事物外貌特征 be like询问性格事物特征 询问外貌特征

    Unit 7 The Birthday Party
    Topic 1 When is your birthday?
    Section D
    ⅠAims and demands目标求
    1Learn the consonants
    ( ( (( ((
    2 Learn some new words and phrases
    special candle surprise do some cleaning
    3 Review the past simple tense with waswere
    4 Review how to talk about dates
    5 Review describing objects and features(shapes)
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    单词卡片录音机日历表MP3
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    检查家庭作业复描述熟悉物品复5b中描述形状相关句型完成3
    1 (检查家庭作业学生口头汇报描述熟悉物品)
    T We’ve known how to describe objects and shapes Please show me your homework Who wants to report it to us
    (检查时纠正学生足)
    2 (复5b中表达形状句子)
    (教师出示部MP3复询问形状表达法然学生身边物品进行关物体形状练活动运列句子)
    What’s the shape of…
    What shape is it
    How long…
    How wide…
    What do we use it for
    Example
    T What’s thisSs It’s an MP3 player
    T What shape is itSs It’s a rectangle
    T How long is itSs It’s … centimeters long
    T How wide is itSs It’s … centimeters wide
    T What do we use it forSs We use it to listen to music
    3 (学生听3录音完成3)
    T Now let’s listen to 3 and fill out the form Then check the answers
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    呈现1引出呈现2
    1 (单词卡片简笔画呈现1语音部分)
    (1)(教师指着黑板问)
    T What color is itSs It’s black
    (教师出示张夹克图片黑板画简笔画)
    T What’s this
    Ss It’s a jacket
    (教师样方法呈现出单词 chicken phone photo physics quarter square quiet twelve between twins 板书)
    black jacket chicken
    phone photo physics
    quarter square quiet
    twelve between twins
    (2)(学生找出单词发音规律)
    T Now let’s look at these words on the blackboard Can you find some rules amongblack jacket and chicken
    S1 Yes they all have the same sound(
    T Rightckis usually pronounced(
    (样方法学生找出三组单词发音规律)
    T Find the rules amongphone photo and physicsquarter square and quiet and twelve between and twins
    (教师总结板书)
    ( black jacket chicken
    ( phone photo physics
    (( quarter square quiet
    (( twelve between twins
    (3)(学生听1录音读)
    T Listen to the tape and follow it
    (4)(教师意抽取张单词卡片学生迅速读出)
    T I’ll show you some word cards You must read them out as quickly as possible
    (5)(学生四组找出含k f kw tw单词然全班汇报组找单词)
    T Work in groups of four Find out other words with ck which pronounces the sound k Let’s see which group can find out the most words
    (组找单词板书黑板老师适补充学生掌握巩固k f kw tw发音解单词)
    Example k quick clock back
    f elephant laugh
    kw quick quite
    tw twenty two twentyone
    2 (引出生日礼物)
    (1)T We know the numbers and the expressions of the date Oh I remember today is May 21st Tomorrow is my mother’s birthday My family plan to celebrate it I want to buy a beautiful light blue dress for my mother My father would like to buy a birthday cake and some candles That would be a surprise for my mother
    (板书画线部分英汉)
    light blue浅蓝色 candle蜡烛 be a surprise for sb……惊喜
    (2)(请学生帮忙提建议引出动词短语)
    T Can you give me some more advice on how to celebrate my mother’s birthday
    (板书动词短语)
    cook food make a cake
    buy some flowers wash clothes
    make a birthday card sing a song

    (学生外动词词组板书黑板)
    (渡步)
    3 (呈现2理解短文容)
    (1)(设置板书限时快速阅读务)
    T Tomorrow is Mrs Brown’s birthday Mr Brown and Mary are planning to celebrate it Now read the passage quickly and answer the questions
    (1) What’s the date of Mary’s mother’s birthday
    (2) What would Mary like to do for her mother
    (3) What does Mary’s father want to do
    (读完 回答问题然核答案)
    (2)(次阅读短文完成短文面判断题然学生找出短文中关键词短语教师总结板书步做准备)
    T Read 2 again do the exercise about the passage and then underline the key words
    May 22nd 1967—plan to celebrate—cook a special dinner—buy a dress—buy a birthday cake and some candles—a surprise
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固2 进步理解课文 复述课文
    1 (教师放2录音 学生读)
    T Listen to the tape and follow it
    2 (学生读 然请名学生班读)
    T Read the text by yourselves Then I’ll ask some students to read it for us
    3 (根第二步呈现黑板关键词 复述课文)
    T Now please close your books look at the key words and phrases on the blackboard and try to retell the text by yourselves
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间15分钟)
    通练复5a 5b
    1 (复日期表达法复5b中列出日期表达法)
    (教师出示张日历表引导学生复日期表达法)
    2010年5月12日
    星期三
    T What day is it
    Ss It’s Wednesday
    T What’s the date today
    Ss It’s May 12th 2010
    (教师张日历分组练日期表达法)
    2 (复5a重点语法中般时教师首先名学生话作示范然桌互相问答)
    T When were you born
    S1 I was born onin…
    T Where were you born
    S1 I was born in…
    3 (操练be born相关句型日期表达法)
    (链式游戏第排学生转第二排学生问:When and where were you born第二排学生回答转第三排学生问 操练直排)
    T Let’s play a game The students in Row 1 turn back to ask the students in Row 2 When and where were you born The students in Row 2 answer and turn back to ask the ones in Row 3 the same question Do it like this one by one until the last row understand
    (学生开始做游戏)
    T Good job
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    利学容进行实践活动
    1 (学生四组做调查报告全班汇报 When were you born Where were you born What’s your favorite present 完成6)
    T Now boys and girls work in groups of four make a survey using the questions in 6 fill out the form and then practice the conversation according to the information in the form
    2 (呈现4 根4提供短语 结合实际情况 写篇短文选名学生全班汇报)
    cook a big dinner make a cake buy some flowers
    make a birthday card do some cleaning sing a song
    T You did a good job Now please write a passage about how to celebrate your father’s mother’s birthday according to the phrases above then I’ll ask some students to report them to us
    Example
    My mother was born on May 12th 1969 Next Tuesday is her fortieth birthday I would like to do some cleaning I also want to sing a song and buy some flowers for her My father wants to cook a big dinner to celebrate it That would be a surprise for her
    3 (家庭作业)
    (1)(果生日 想度?写篇短文)
    T If your birthday is coming How do you plan to celebrate it Write a passage about that You may write like this
    Example
    I was born on May 24th 1996 My birthday is coming I want to ask my friends to come to my party I would like to say Thank you to my parents because they love me so much I want to give them some special presents That would be a surprise for them
    (2)(课外搜集关年月日英文歌谣全班学欣赏)
    T Collect some songs about date and then share with your classmates
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    That would be a surprise for Mrs Brown
    处would表示文想象带出结果
    Example
    She would look better with short hair 留短发会显


    Unit 7 The Birthday Party
    Topic 2 Can you Sing an English song
    Section A
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn the new phrases
    have a good time dance to disco perform ballet no way
    2 Learn the usage of can andcan’tfor ability and inability
    (1)I can only sing English songs
    (2)What else can you do
    (3)Can you see the bread No I can’t
    3 Learn the alternative questions
    Can you dance or draw I can dance I can do it a littlevery well
    法制教育:

    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    篮球吉吉简笔画录音机
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复动词短语
    (复前学含play动词短语学生四组 列出已学动词短语 组写)
    T Work in groups of four Write as many verbal phrases with play as you can Let’s see which group can write out the most phrases One phrase one point Now let’s start
    Group
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    Point










    (组写完 派代表全班学生汇报 然教师动词短语板书黑板)
    Example
    play basketball play football
    play the guitar play the piano

    T Look at the first phrase Let’s talk about it
    (渡步)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    呈现1a2引出cancan’t法
    1 (教师出示篮球 引出情态动词can)
    T What’s this in English
    SsIt’s a basketball
    T Right I like basketball very much I often play it on the playground after school I can play it very well(教师做篮球动作)
    2 (询问学生喜欢体育活动 引出can’t)
    T Which sport do you like bestS1 I like football best
    T Great I like football too But I can’t play it (时教师做摇头动作)
    Can you play football
    can can’tcan not
    S1 Yes I can I can play it well (教师帮助学生回答)
    (板书)
    3 (教师出吉画幅吉简笔画)
    T What’s this
    S2 It’s a guitar
    T I can’t play the guitar Who can play it
    S3 I can
    4 (教师学生台表演 活跃课堂气氛请学生表演跳芭蕾舞迪斯科动作黑板出示相应简笔画)
    T What’s heshe doing
    Ss HeShe is dancing
    T Aha HeShe can perform balletdance to disco
    (板书画线部分)
    perform ballet
    dance to disco
    5 (学生做2然核答案表演话)
    T Look at the picture in 2 Fill in the blanks check the answers and act it out
    6 (周三康康生日 学生讨表演节目练cancan’t法)
    T Next Wednesday is Kangkang’s birthday We plan to have a birthday party for him I think I can sing an English song at Kangkang’s birthday party Talk about what you can do at the party Work in pairs like this (教师示意名学生配合作示范练)
    T Can you sing Chinese songs at Kangkang’s birthday party
    S1 Yes I can What about you
    T I can’t sing Chinese songs But I can sing English songs
    S1 …
    (学生助黑板短语桌话)
    T Well done What can Jane and Maria do at Kangkang’s birthday party Let’s listen to 1a carefully and answer the questions
    (渡步)
    7 (呈现1a 回答关问题 解课文容)
    (1) Can Jane sing Chinese songs
    (2) Can Maria dance to disco
    (3) Can Maria perform ballet
    (1)(设置板书听力务)
    T Now listen to the tape and answer the following questions
    (2)(听录音 回答问题然核答案)
    (3)(学生朗读1a话找出关键词词组句型)
    (板书)
    birthday party—play the piano—sing some songs—Chinese songs—English songs—
    what else—play the guitar—dance to disco—perform ballet—have a good time
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固1a掌握语音语调 表演话
    1 (教师放1a录音 学生读 铅笔标出重读语调)
    T Follow the tape and mark the stress and intonation with your pencil
    2 (教师学生擦标重读语调 先读 然录音起读 逐句核语音语调)
    T Rub them out read by yourselves and then check your pronunciation and intonation sentence by 图2正面
    图2反面
    sentence according to the tape Go
    3 (机话)
    T Suppose you are Maria listen to Jane and make a dialog with her
    4 (利黑板关键词词组句型两组表演1a开展组竞赛鼓励学生创新必课序)
    T Work in pairs close your books look at the blackboard and act out the dialog with your partner You’d better use your own words
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间15分钟)
    练1b1c呈现3练选择疑问句
    1 (师生起口头完成1b然学生完成1c)
    (1)(求学会cancan’t法完成1b)
    T Now boys and girls Let’s talk about what Jane and Maria can do at Kangkang’s birthday party What can Jane do at the party
    Ss She can sing English songs dance to disco and play the guitar
    T What about Maria
    Ss She can play the piano sing Chinese songs and perform ballet
    T What can’t Jane do at the partySs She can’t sing Chinese songs…
    (2)(学生完成1c进步掌握运cancan’t语言学运现实生活中)
    T If you are at a party what can you do Work in pairs Compare your answer with your partner’s
    2 (练选择疑问句完成3)

    (1)(呈现练选择疑问句)
    Can Jane dance to disco or perform ballet
    She can dance to disco
    T Well done According to 1a please answer the questionCan Jane dance to disco or perform ballet
    Ss She can dance to discoT Yes you are right
    (板书)
    (学生利3中图片图片面词短语两组练选择疑问句)
    (2)(完成3学生掌握选择疑问句答语会运a little very well)
    (方案:教师黑板画幅画)
    T Look I can draw a picture but not very well Can you draw
    (名学生黑板画画引导回答)S1 Yes a little
    very well
    图1反面
    图1正面
    (方案二:教师出幅体现名男生篮球非常图片图图1正面画面图1背面写very well)
    T Can he play basketball
    Ss Yes he can
    T Yes He can play it very well
    (教师出示幅弹吉图片右图)
    a little
    T Can he play the guitarSs Yes he can
    T Yes He can play it a little
    (板书画线部分短语)
    图2反面
    图2正面
    a little very well
    (学生两组练表演3)
    T Practice 3 in pairs and act it out
    S法制教育:


    tep 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    组活动 巩固情态动词can can’t法
    1 (做调查 班汇报完成4巩固cancan’t法)
    T Survey what your classmates in your group can or can’t do and complete the table Then report it to the class Put a√forcanand a×forcan’t
    Name
    Swim
    Draw
    Sing
    Dance
    Drive

    Li Ling

    ×











    2 (学生成立俱乐部)
    (活动组活动 目培养学生合作意识团队精神动手力全班学生分成六组 中三组应聘员 三组招聘员 招聘三组组负责俱乐部 公布招聘结果)
    Example
    (Group A音乐俱乐部 Group B运动俱乐部 Group C乐器俱乐部)
    Group A What can you do Michael
    Michael I can play the piano

    Music Club Sport Club Instrument Club
    Name
    Ability

    Name
    Ability

    Name
    Ability
    Michael
    play the piano










    3 (家庭作业)
    (解邻居者亲戚家里宠物做做事情cancan’t全班学汇报)
    Example
    Aunt Lee has a pet dog It can carry a basket with its mouth but it can’t sing a song…
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    soccer美式英语指足球运动:play soccer踢足球美式英语中soccer ball指足球:There’s a soccer ball under the bed
    football英式英语指足球运动:play football指足球:There’s a football under the bed
    rugby意橄榄球美国称football







    Unit 7 The Birthday Party
    Topic 2 Can you Sing an English song
    Section B
    Section B needs 1 period Section B需1课时
    The main activities are 1a and 2 课重点活动1a2
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words
    smart count climb pig
    2 Go on learning the usage ofcanfor ability and can’t for inability
    (1) Can you sing an English song Of course I can
    (2)What can a monkey do It can climb trees but it can’t swim at all
    (3)He can speak English very well but he can’t sing English songs
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    图片面具录音机实物
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间7分钟)
    复情态动词can法引入1a
    1 (学生听学唱I can sing it well首歌完成5求学生边唱边做动作复情态动词can法)
    T Let’s listen to the song I can sing it well together We must sing and act at the same time
    Example
    Can you swim Yes I can (边唱边做游泳动作)
    Can you fly No I can’t (边唱边双臂做飞翔动作)
    Can you sing Yes I can(边唱边手做话筒唱歌动作)
    2 (学生分组演唱首歌进行赛)
    3 (检查作业)
    (教师部分学汇报昨天解关宠物会做会做事情目学生感受动物爱友激发热爱动物热情汇报教师适评说)
    T We know animals are useful and lovely I love them very much What about you boys and girls
    4 (教师讲台堆放书 引出单词count)
    T Look There are many books on the teacher’s desk I don’t know how many books there are S1 can you count them for me
    (教学单词count)
    count smart
    S1 Yes I can One two three four… There are fifteen books on the teacher’s desk
    T Very good You are smart
    (板书)
    (教师呈现物品图片 学生练count法)
    T How many pens are there in the bag Please count them
    Ss There are twelve
    T Good job Let’s stop Do you know what Polly can do Can it count Let’s listen to 1a and answer the questions
    (渡步)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间5分钟)
    (1) Can Polly speak English
    (2) Can Polly sing an English song
    (3) Can Polly count
    (4) Can Polly count the flowers
    呈现1a理解1a容回答关问题
    1 (设置板书听力务)
    T Listen to 1a and answer the following questions
    2 (听1a录音回答问题教师核答案讲解该部分)
    3 (学生朗读1a中话找出关键词短语)
    T Please read 1a and find out the key words and phrases
    (板书)
    speak English—sing an English song—what else—count
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间8分钟)
    巩固1a完成1b
    1 (教师放1a录音 学生读 铅笔标出重读语调)
    T Follow the tape and mark the stress and intonation with your pencil
    2 (学生擦标重读语调 先读 然录音起读 逐句核语音语调)
    T Rub them out Read by yourselves and then check your pronunciation and intonation sentence by sentence according to the tape Ready Go
    3 (学生运黑板关键词短语三组表演1a 完成1b)
    T Now work in groups of three Look at the key words and phrases on the blackboard and act out the dialog Then read 1a again and make a similar dialog with your partners Finish 1b
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间15分钟)
    练2完成3
    1 (练2)
    (1)(教师先出示张猴子图片引出climb呈现句型)
    T OK Let’s look at the pictures about animals What’s this in English
    Ss It’s a monkey
    T What can a monkey do
    Ss It can 爬树
    T Yes it can climb trees very well but it can’t swim at all
    (2)(教师样方法教学单词pig板书)
    climb pig very well not…at all
    It can climb trees but it can’t swim at all
    (3)(学生两组利课图片互相问答完成2)
    T Now please work in pairs Ask and answer like this
    (示意两学生做示范)
    S1 What can…do
    S2 It can… but it can’t…
    2 (1)(呈现3听录音完成3)
    T You are smart Now boys and girls look at the pictures and the table in 3 listen to the tape and finish 3
    (播放录音学生完成A)
    (学生听录音完成B)
    (2)(学生根图片听力材料 编话 注意操练very well a little not … at all法)
    T OK Next let’s make a dialog according to the recording Pay attention to very well a little not… at all please
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通讨游戏 进步巩固情态动词can can’t法
    1 (呈现4分组谈朋友 4中短语完成4)
    T Talk about one of your friends using the expressions in the box that may help you You may use your own words and begin like this
    Jack is my friend He can speak English very well but he can’t sing English songs…
    2 (游戏课前准备张写老虎狮子猴子等单词纸片面具 纸片反扣桌面具放起两组 翻桌纸片然说 I can… but I can’t…根解说 判断出种动物 然寻找相应面具 戴面具说 I’m a… I can… but I can’t… 限定时间 面具纸片写动物应组获胜)
    3 (唱I can sing it well首歌)
    T Let’s sing I can sing it well together again This time you may change the verbs in the song and do the actions at the same time
    (学生动词换唱出 边唱边做相应动作 便熟练掌握cancan’t法)
    4 (家庭作业)
    (学生回家调查家庭成员会做会做事 写成短文)
    T Interview your family members about what they can do and what they can’t do and write a passage about it You can make a form according to your passage I am sure you can do it very well
    Example
    My name is Wang Haozan There are four people in my family They are my father my mother my sister and I My father can sing a little but he can’t dance at all My mother can speak English but she can’t speak Japanese My sister Wang Jing can draw very well but she can’t swim at all I can dance to disco but I can’t perform ballet We are learning from each other now
    Member
    Can
    Can’t



















    Unit 7 The Birthday Party
    Topic 2 Can you Sing an English song
    Section C
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    ago pingpong be good at
    2 Talk about the past form could of the modal verb can and its negative form couldn’t
    (1)She can fly kites very well now But one year ago she couldn’t do it at all
    (2)She can perform ballet very well now But when she was five she could dance just a little
    (3)They can sing English songs now but they couldn’t sing any English songs two years ago
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    简笔画录音机
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复情态动词can can’t
    1 (师生唱I can sing it well首歌)
    T Let’s sing I can sing it well togetherCan you swim Yes I can Go
    Ss Can you swim Yes I can…
    2 (猜谜活动学生表演动作游泳骑行车等学猜运cancan’t表述)
    Example
    (学生表演游泳时做求救状)
    T Can he swimSs No he can’t
    (然学生三组表演两问答)
    T Now work in groups of three One acts while the other two ask and answer
    S1 (做骑行车状)S2 Can heshe ride a bike
    S3 Yes heshe can HeShe can ride very well…
    T Good job Look at the blackboard I want to draw some pictures for you Pay attention to the words under the pictures
    (渡步)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间15分钟)
    呈现1a理解1a容回答关问题
    1 (利简笔画cancouldn’t谈某做某事引出生词短语)






    (Michael 5 years old) (now)




    (Kangkang one year ago) (now)
    could couldn’t pingpong be good at
    T Michael can play basketball now But when he was five he couldn’t play basketball Kangkang could play pingpong one year ago but not very well Now he is good at playing it
    (板书)
    2 (呈现1a 理解课文容)
    (1)(教师设计时间状语板书 引导学生造句子 学couldcouldn’t)
    could swim one year ago
    could not ride a bike two years ago
    couldn’t fly a kite when I was five
    could play table tennis last year
    (学生黑板列出短语造句子)
    T Suppose I could do something one year agowhen I was five how to express it Look at the blackboard and make a sentence according to these phrases
    (2)(1a图画快速阅读短文回答问题)
    T It’s time for outdoor activities What are Jane Maria Michael and Kangkang doing Do you want to know Look at the pictures We can know
    (1) When couldn’t Jane fly a kite
    (2) How old was Maria when she could dance
    (3) What is Kangkang good at
    (4) What is Michael good at
    (设置板书阅读务)
    (学生阅读短文回答问题)
    T Read the passage and answer the questions on the blackboard
    (3)(次阅读短文 圈出短文中动词短语 找出重点活动)
    T Read 1a and circle the activities
    (板书动词短语)
    fly a kite—perform ballet—play pingpong—play soccer—do well in basketball
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固1a完成1b
    1 (学生独立完成1b)
    T Fill out the form in 1b by yourselves
    2 (检查学生做答案)
    T Let’s check the answers Who would like to share your answers Volunteers
    S1 …S2 ……T Well done
    3 (学生读1a录音注意语音语调)
    T Follow the tape and pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation
    4 (根实际情况 说出根做者做点 现做事)
    T Please make sentences like this
    (1) I couldn’t speak Japanese at all one year ago but now I can speak it very well
    (2) I could dance a little when I was five but now I can dance very well
    (3) I couldn’t perform ballet at all when I was seven but now I can perform ballet very well

    5 (结活动找组学生讲台 名学生说You can play basketball now名学生说But I couldn’t play basketball three years ago)
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    练完成2 3
    1 (1)(2图片 猜做动作)
    T Now let’s look at the pictures in 2 Can you guess what they are doing Now look at the picture in my hand
    Ss The are singing
    T You are right They can sing English songs now but they couldn’t sing any English songs two years ago
    (逐展示2中图片学生回答)
    (2)(学生3幅图示范独完成句子完成2)
    T Look at the other pictures and complete the sentences after the example
    (3) (检查答案出评价)
    T Let’s check the answers

    2 (学生听录音完成3)
    (1)(学生听两遍录音完成3)
    (2)(检查核答案)
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    联系实际结合示例运could couldn’t加深理解
    1 (根实际情况 填充列表格)
    T Please complete the table Write down your own ability and inability
    (1)I could write
    (2)I could count
    (3)I could sing

    when I was four

    (1)I couldn’t ride a bike
    (2)I couldn’t swim
    (3)I couldn’t play table tennis

    when I was four but now I can

    (1)I couldn’t speak Japanese
    (2)I couldn’t drive a car
    (3)I couldn’t play the piano

    when I was four and I still can’t now
    2 (家庭作业)
    (学生回家调查爷爷奶奶爸爸妈妈样年纪时做活动 做活动写篇短文)
    T Make a survey about what your grandparents andor parents could or couldn’t do at your age Write a passage
    Example
    My parents
    I’m Wang Jing I’m thirteen years old My father is a teacher He could do a lot of housework when he was thirteen years old but he couldn’t play any computer game My mother is a worker When she was thirteen she could help work on the farm but she couldn’t swim at all She still can’t do it now My parents teach me a lot and I love them
    Unit 7 The Birthday Party
    Topic 2 Can you Sing an English song
    Section D
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some consonants
    ( ( ( ( (( (b n t等字母发音情况)
    2 Learn some new words and phrases
    at the age of anything word mean
    3Ability and inability
    When she was three she could play the piano
    She could draw very well at the age of five but she couldn’t write at all
    She couldn’t see anything any more
    Jenny can write many words now
    4Review the alternative questions
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    卡片简笔画录音机
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复单词 呈现音标
    (呈现含n ( ( r ((发音含发音字母单词学生读出组单词试着找出中含相音素发音字母)
    Example
    G1 know knee knock knife nine nice not ( (字母k词首kn中发音)
    G2 morning sing song strong thing think thank ( (字母nk前g前均发()
    G3 where when white which want was window ( (字母w wh发w)
    G4 write wrong writer red rice right run ( (字母wr前发音)
    G5 age orange message vegetable just jacket Japan (( (字母ge j发(()
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间15分钟)
    呈现12理解练1
    1 (教师总结讲解发音字母)
    (板书)
    (
    n
    (
    n(k)
    (
    wh
    (
    r
    ((
    ge
    kn
    ng
    w
    wr
    j
    2 (学生听1录音读)
    T Please listen to 1 and read after the tape
    3 (教师动词短语相关动作制成卡片 单元相关动词短语进行复教师快速呈现卡片 学生抢答 激发学热情)
    T Look at my pictures and let’s see who can speak most quickly
    Ss Play football fly a kite play basketball perform ballet






    4 (做接龙游戏 复can肯定否定问答形式)
    T OK Good Let’s play a game Begin like this
    I can play soccer What can you do
    S1 I can fly a kite What can you do
    S2 I can play basketball What can you do
    S3 I can perform ballet What can you do

    (三组成组否定句进行操练)
    Example
    S4 I can’t play soccer but I can play basketball
    S5 I can’t play basketball but I can sing a song
    S6 I can’t sing a song but I can dance ballet

    (教师评价表现学予表扬)
    T Well done Congratulations
    5 (1)(教师出示幅简笔画)

    (板书例句)
    I couldn’t swim when I was ten years old but I could play basketball
    (教师引导学生根简笔画结合实际运could couldn’t造句教师边巡视 边予必指导)
    (2)(抛开简笔画 学生发挥想象力 回忆 could couldn’t造句)
    T Let’s go back to the past time through the time channel and tell us what you could do
    S7 I could play the piano when I was 7
    S8 I could draw pictures when I was 4
    S9 I could play the piano when I was 8
    S10I couldn’t play the piano but I could write when I was five

    T You are the best
    (渡步)
    6 (听录音完成2)
    (1)(播放2录音解意)
    T Now I’ll introduce a new friend Jenny What could she do Do you want to know
    Ss Yes
    T Let’s listen to the tape
    (2)(设置板书听力务 听遍2录音 回答问题)
    (1) Where does she live
    (2) What could Jenny do at her different ages
    T Let’s listen to 2 again and answer the questions on the blackboard
    S11 London She lives in London
    S12 She could play the piano when she was three…
    (3)(板书教学单词anything word短语at the age of)
    (板书)
    anything word at the age of
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    通练进步掌握2容
    1 (学生3分钟时间2 做2练然核答案解释mean)
    T Read the passage in 2 and finish the exercises in 2
    T Are you ready Time is up Let’s check the answers together The first one S1 please
    S1 Jenny may be 15 years old now
    S2 When Jenny was five she could draw and play the piano
    S3 In the texthardmeansdifficult
    S4 She is great and smart
    2 (读2 学生起找出2关键词 教师板书)
    T Now let’s read the passage again and find out the key words I will write them down on the blackboard
    S5 Jenny
    S6 London
    S7 …
    Jenny—London—three—five—six—ago—wrong—eyes—hard—help—write—A Smart Girl—great
    3 (学生利关键词复述课文)
    T Now please retell the passage with the key words on the blackboard
    S8Jenny lives in London with her parents When she was three she could play the piano…
    (学生复述完 教师进行评价)
    4 (学生介绍崇拜)
    T Please introduce the people you admire
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    练3 完成4a 4b
    1 (学生根表格中信息can can’t couldcouldn’t造句)
    Ability or inability
    Time


    now
    play volleyball
    play basketball
    two years ago
    take photos
    play the guitar
    five years old
    draw pictures
    write
    at the age of nine
    ride a bike
    fly a kite
    T Look at the table Write sentences with can can’t could or couldn’t
    Example
    I can play volleyball now but I can’t play basketball
    Could you take photos two years ago
    Yes I could But I couldn’t play the guitar
    When I was five years old I could draw pictures but I couldn’t write
    I could ride a bike at the age of nine but I couldn’t fly a kite

    2 (通练纳总结选择疑问句法)
    T In this topic we must master the usages of alternative questions Let’s do some exercises and then sum up its usage
    (1)(问答练)
    T Please listen to me carefully and answer my questions together Can you play volleyball or basketball
    Ss I can play basketball
    T Do you want to play volleyball or basketball
    Ss I want to play basketball
    (2)(学生独立思考根实际情况回答列问题求学生努力发现选择问句回答规律)
    T Look and answer the following questions alone
    Questions
    ①Can you take photos or play the guitar
    ②Could you draw pictures or write when you were five years old
    ③Do you want to ride a bike or fly a kite
    ④Does Jenny live in London or New York with her parents
    ⑤Was the life hard or easy for Jenny
    ⑥Are Michael and Kangkang good at playing pingpong or flying kites
    (教师点拨指导学生总结选择问句表述方式回答)
    3 (学生进步熟悉单元重点容4a4b)
    T Now stop to read 4a and 4b by yourselves paying attention to the usage of can and could
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间5分钟)
    利活动写作加深can can’t could couldn’t理解掌握
    1 (完成5)
    T Now let’s work in groups One student performs while the other students guess and make sentences like this
    (板书例句)
    HeShe can ride a bike but heshe can’t play basketball
    T Understand Go
    2 (家庭作业)
    (写篇关成长历文章 cancould否定形式 60单词左右完成3)









    Unit 7 The Birthday Party
    Topic 3 Everyone had a wonderful party
    Section A
    Section A needs 1 period Section A需1课时
    The main activities are 1a and 2 课重点活动1a2
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    did recite poem magic himself enjoy oneself yesterday
    2 Learn the past simple tense
    (1)Did you sing a song at the party Yes I did
    (2)What did Sally do She danced
    (3)What about Tom He performed magic tricks
    3 Praise and encouragement You speak Chinese very well
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具 图片录音机
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复动词短语 引入1a
    1 (教师呈现图片 复动词短语)
    (教师手图片 图片背学生 名学生前面做图片动作 学生猜出动作)(板书关键句型)
    Did you… Yes I didNo I didn’t
    T Now look at this picture and do the actions like thisS1 (手话筒做唱歌状)
    T Guess like this Did you… and answer like this Yes I didNo I didn’t
    S2 Did you sing a songS1 Yes I didS3 (做跳舞状)
    S4 Did you play the guitarS3 No I didn’t
    S4 Did you danceS3 Yes I did
    (练四张图片 学生初步解did法 然桌互相问答)
    T OK You did very well We know Kangkang had a birthday party last Wednesday Can you guess what the children did at Kangkang’s birthday party(渡步)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    呈现1a2 回答关问题 解行动词式
    1 (学生猜孩子康康生日聚会做什教师呈现2中更动词短语教学生词)
    (板书动词短语掌握recite poem magic理解trick Kung fu)
    sing an English song sing a Chinese song recite a Chinese poem perform magic tricks
    play the piano dance the disco play the guitar perform Chinese Kung fu
    2 (设置板书听力务 放1a录音)
    (1) Did Jane recite a Chinese poem at the party(2) What did Sally do
    (3) What did Tom do(4) How was Kangkang at the party
    T Let’s listen to 1a and answer the questions on the blackboard
    (听完录音 回答问题核答案彩色粉笔原板书动词短语中动词变成式)
    3 (学生70页2中节目单 解演出情况然听2录音完成2)
    T Now let’s turn to page 70 First please look at the program list then circle the programs you hear and fill in blanks with proper forms of the verbs
    (六名学生回答填答案 句注意动词式读音变化)
    T Let’s check the answers I’ll ask six of you to answer the questions
    S1 …played…sang…recited…played…danced…performed…
    T Very good (表扬学生 学生感学快乐)
    (板书生词yesterday求掌握)
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间15分钟)
    巩固1a 掌握语音语调进步理解话
    1 (放1a录音 学生读铅笔标出重读语调)
    T Now listen to the tape again and mark the stress and intonation with your pencil
    (板书生词理解certainly掌握enjoy oneself)
    certainly enjoy oneself
    2 (先读遍话 然录音机起读)
    T First I’ll give you one minute to read the dialog
    (声朗读根黑板关键词理解整话)T Follow the tape
    3 (机话然交换角色话遍)
    T OK Now let’s make a conversation with the tape Suppose the tape is Ben and you are Jane
    4 (学生阅读1a完成1b中A教师已板书动词短语旁加施动者名)
    (板书)Jane Helen Sally Tom Michael Kangkang Jack Maria
    5 (根板书 两组表演1a需记部分组织语言)
    T Work in pairs close your books and look at the blackboard then act out the dialog
    S1 How was Kangkang’s birthday party
    S2 It was very nice…
    6 (根板书结合1a2复述康康生日聚会完成1bB部分强调动词式运)
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    巩固2掌握规动词式
    1 (学生根2节目单 两组话进步掌握句型Did you…)
    T Now let’s do oral work in pairs Look at the program list in 2 and make conversations with your partner like this(示意两名学生作示范)
    S1Hi Maria Did you go to Kangkang’s partyS2Yes I did
    S1Did you play the guitar S2No I didn’t I played the pianoT Ready Go
    2 (教师板书变化规动词学生试着写出式)
    play miss wash use like dance carry try shop plan
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间5分钟)
    通游戏巩固般式 时联系实际加运
    1 (完成3)T Let’s play this game Suppose you are one of Kangkang’s friends Act and let your partner guess what you did at Kangkang’s party
    2 (家庭作业) (1)(注意观察总结动词式什变化规)
    (2)(根生日情景 做报告)
    T Write a report about your birthday party You can begin like this Here is a report about how I spent my birthday…
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    做节目单时 般guitar playing说playing the guitar时 guitar playing复合名词
    Unit 7 The Birthday Party
    Topic 3 Everyone had a wonderful party
    Section B
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    fall wash at once happen stand up come back video game truth everyone had tell a lie angry
    2 Talk about past events
    I missed the chair and fell down
    Did you hurt yourself
    What time did you come back home last night Judy
    3 Blame and complaint
    How could you lie to me
    Why did you come back so late
    Why didn’t you tell me the truth
    4 Praise It was wonderful
    5 SurpriseReally
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    图片录音机挂图
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复生日聚会功语导入1a
    (方案 方案知识性强 求学生定熟悉节课容)
    (Section A 1a复康康生日晚会情况 引出康康生日项活动)
    T At Kangkang’s birthday party What did his friends do
    (教师手图片 正面物 背面动词短语 学生回忆康康生日晚会做活动)
    Ss Helen recited a Chinese poem Jane sang a song Sally danced Tom performed magic tricks
    T You’re right After that Kangkang played a game named Musical Chairs with his classmates Do you want to know what happened to Michael Now let’s listen to the conversation among Michael Jane Kangkang and Maria
    (板书happen求掌握)
    (方案二 该方案活动性强 易提高学兴趣 学生迅速进入角色)
    (Musical Chairs游戏铺垫1a话事先组织学生教室空放五椅子 六学生做游戏 谁获胜完成3)
    T Today we’ll play a game named Musical Chairs Listen to the music and run around the chairs When the music stops sit down on the chair beside you The one who misses the chair has to leave the game with one chair Then the game goes on this way until there are two people left competing for one chair The one who sits on the last chair is the winner
    T OK Now stop … is the winner Clap your hands for himher Go back to your seat At Kangkang’s birthday party Kangkang also played this game with his friends Do you want to know who lost the game And what happened to Michael Now let’s listen to the conversation carefully
    (板书happen求掌握)
    (渡步)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间5分钟)
    呈现1a 理解课文容 针性回答问题
    1 (设置板书听力务 学生带着务听1a录音)
    (1) Who missed the chair(2) Did he hurt himself (3) What did he do next
    T Now let’s listen to the tape and then answer the questions on the blackboard
    2 (听完录音 回答问题 然核答案)
    T OK Now let’s check the answers
    (板书生词理解ouch掌握fall wash at once)
    ouch fall wash at once
    3 (学生说出短文中关键词短语 教师边补充说明边板书)
    missed the chair—fell down—hurt yourself—hands—washroom
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    巩固1a 表演应
    1 (听1a录音 黑板重点单词词组读)
    T Look at the key words and phrases on the blackboard Listen to the tape again and follow it
    2 (纠正语音语调)
    T Follow the tape Pay attention to your pronunciation and intonation
    3 (学生读两分钟话)
    T Now read the conversation of 1a by yourselves on page 71 I’ll give you two minutes
    4 (黑板关键词短语 四组 脱离书根理解记忆表演1a 加入语言情感 学 学致)
    (1)T Work in groups of four Close your books and look at the key words and phrases on the blackboard Act out the dialog…
    (2)T Look at the pictures get the key sentences and then make conversations in groups
    (培养合作精神步骤根实际情况选)
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间15分钟)
    完成1b听2a录音回答问题 练话
    1 (学生独立完成1b 培养学力)
    T Now work alone Do 1b by yourselves and check the statements to know what happened to Michael at the party
    Ss Michael missed the chair and fell down He was OK and washed his hands
    (板书生词求掌握)stand stand up
    2 (学生根1a挂图关键词复述话 培养语言迁移力)
    T Make a report to retell the story you can begin like this
    At Kangkang’s birthday party they played a game…
    3 (知道迈克尔康康生日晚会Musical Chairs游戏中遭遇 面解朱迪昨晚做什 遇什事图 做幅图片学生猜究竟发生什)
    T At Kangkang’s birthday party we know Michael missed the chair and fell down but what happened to Judy last night Look at the picture Can you guess
    4 (图片目标语言猜出朱迪晚 导出blame and complaint)
    (1)(设置板书听力务 学生带着务听2a录音回答问题)
    Did Judy go to play video games last night
    (2)(板书关键词组)
    T Look at the key phrases on the blackboard
    What time come back half past ten
    How lie at that time
    Why late video games went to the party really
    Why didn’t tell the truth end late forgot the time
    (3)(听遍录音 根关键词组回答黑板问题 掌握关责备抱怨句型)
    (4)(两组做话练注意话中表示责备赞扬惊讶等句子语调然根板书关键词组练话)
    T Now please work in pairs and practice the dialog Pay attention to the intonation
    (板书掌握生词)
    everyone had
    5 (学生根2a完成2b然集体核答案板书动词式重词组)
    go—went havehas—had forget—forgot come—came
    get—got tell—told make—made think—thought
    the next morning tell a lie make sb very angry
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    实践调查 培养正确情感态度价值观
    1 (学生作调查 练话)
    (首先 学生分四组做调查报告 老师板书问题Did you ever come back home very late at night Did you ever tell a lie 学生猜ever意思 然全组集体调查 学生提问How many students neverseldomsometimes… came home very latetold a lie 意抽查学生家汇报)
    Did you ever come back home very late at night
    Did you ever tell a lie
    How many students neverseldomsometimes…came home very latetold a lie
    Example
    S1 In our group 8 students told a lie once 2 students never…
    2 (教师鼓励学生说实话 正视犯错误 说谎 做诚实孩子 培养学生正确情感态度价值观)
    T Did you ever tell a lie Why
    3 (学生根撒谎进行反思 写出危害 回家里时父母沟通 增进
    父母感情活动根学生具体情况弹性握)
    T Write a passage about a lie and read it to your parents
    4 (介绍关撒谎语)It’s good to tell a white lie Telling lies is bad
    Cheating others is cheating ourselves
    5 (家庭作业)(预课单词动词式)
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    1 Why didn’t you tell me the truth 句否定疑问句表示责备抱怨
    2 lie现分词形式lying教师提醒学生注意特殊形式
    3 What happened to Michael at the party句语what助动词didsth happens to sb意某发生某事提醒学生说sb happens sth






    Unit 7 The Birthday Party
    Topic 3 Everyone had a wonderful party
    Section C
    Section C needs 1 period Section C需1课时
    The main activities are 1 and 3 课重点活动13
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    each silent blow out breath sunny delicious funny
    2 Learn the irregular past forms of verbs
    isam—was are—were stand—stood do—did sing—sang fall—fell go—went forget—forgot come—came get—got havehas—had tell—told make—made think—thought lose—lost buy—bought bring—brought give—gave sit—sat blow—blew
    3Talk about Kangkang’s birthday party celebration
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    图片挂图录音机卡片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复引入1
    1 (复康康生日庆祝方式)
    (方案 图片协助回顾)
    T Can you remember what they did at Kangkang’s birthday party
    Ss Yes Jane sang an English song Helen recited a Chinese poem Sally danced Tom performed
    magic tricks and Kangkang performed kung fu
    (方案二 简笔画协助回顾 容方案)

    (教师展现Section B 1a中Musical Chairs游戏图)
    T What happened to Michael in the game
    (帮助引导学生回答出关键词短语missed fell down lost)
    Ss Michael missed the chair and fell down so he lost the game
    T Very good
    T From the last lesson we knew what the children did at Kangkang’s birthday party Do you want to know more about it Let’s read the passage on Page 73
    (板书课题)
    Section C
    Kangkang’s Birthday Party
    2 (教师1中围坐桌旁吃蛋糕图片挂黑板 学生康康生日时场景没条件区 教师直接学生教材73页图片)
    T First let’s circle the past form of verbs in the passage and read them aloud(检查预情况)
    T Now look at the picture on the blackboardon Page 73 How did Kangkang celebrate his birthday party How old is Kangkang Do you know
    Ss …
    (渡步)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间15分钟)
    呈现1 回答关问题 理解初步掌握课文容
    1 (设置板书听力务学生听1录音)
    T Now look at the questions on the blackboard then listen and answer these questions
    (板书)
    (1) What did Kangkang’s parents buy for his friends
    (2) How old is Kangkang
    (3) Did they have a good time
    (听完录音回答问题然师生起核答案)
    T Now can you answer these questions on the blackboard Let’s check the answers
    T OK Next I’ll give you 3 minutes to read the passage in 1 quickly then answer the following questions in 1
    (学生读完文章 师生起核答案)
    T Now let’s check the answers together The first one …
    2 (通听力阅读训练 学生已致解康康生日聚会情况学生起讨谁生日 里举行 谁参加 干什 结果样培养学生语言迁移力)
    T We have learned something about Kangkang’s birthday party Now discuss in groups then fill out the form on the blackboard and after a while I will check the answers
    (板书)
    Whose birthday Where Who What How

    (学生讨2分钟 师生起核答案)
    T Are you ready Now let’s check the answers together
    T Whose birthday was it
    Ss It was Kangkang’s birthday

    3 (学生互相讨 找出面表格中关键词词组教师板书呈现 步学生复述做准备)
    T Very good Now please discuss with each other and find out the key words and I’ll write them down on the blackboard
    last Wednesday(when)—at Kangkang’s home(where)—his friends(who)—each one gave him presents and birthday cards—by hand—sat around the cake—made a silent wish—blew the candles out in one breath—danced—sang songs—played games(what)—had a good time(how)
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间9分钟)
    巩固进步掌握描述生日功语
    1 (学生根黑板关键词词组23分钟准备复述课文)
    T Use the key words and phrases on the blackboard to retell the passage I’ll give you two to three minutes to prepare it (定时间教师学复述) Who will have a try
    S1 Last Wednesday Kangkang celebrated his birthday at his home and his friends gave presents and birthday cards to him…
    (学生会表达词汇 教师予帮助 体现教师学生间关系——教师导学生体)
    2 (学生独立完成2 培养学生学力)
    T Well done You used many past forms of irregular verbs to retell the passage in 1 now let’s learn more Please do 2 by yourselves I’ll give you two minutes to finish it
    (2分钟 核答案)
    T Time is up Now let’s check the answers
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间11分钟)
    进步练动词规变化形式时完成3
    1 (变化规动词制成卡片 强化练卡片正面写动词原形 反面写式学
    生抢答方式进行练原形说出式 式说出原形)
    are sing lose come have buy …
    were sang lost came had bought …
    T Now let’s have a competition I’ll show you some cards with verbs on them When you see the past form please tell us its original form When you see the original form please tell us its past form OK Now let’s see who’s the best I’ll give him or her a prize
    (教师出示卡片have)
    S1 Had
    (教师出示卡片lost)
    S2 Lose

    (通奖励鼓励学生做预进入步)
    2 (通量练 学生已掌握节课动词式规变化 基础
    进入3练)
    T Now do 3 by yourselves as quickly as you can
    (学生填完空格 教师核答案)
    T Time is up Let’s check the answers together
    Ss …was…had…came…played…sang…lost…
    T Very good
    (板书生词求掌握)
    sunny delicious funny
    3 (学生变换称复述3运学单词短语)
    T Retell 3 paying special attention to the change of the first second and third person pronouns as the speaker is changed using the words and phrases we have learnt recently as many as possible
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间5分钟)
    关生日词汇动词短语展开活动 锻炼学生语言综合运力
    1 (课谈康康生日教师问学生没天天生日果家起唱生日快乐歌祝福生日快乐完成4)
    T We have talked about Kangkang’s birthday Is anybody’s birthday today Please hands up
    (学生举手)
    S1 It’s my birthday today
    T Good Let’s sing Happy Birthday for himher
    Ss Happy birthday to you…
    2 (唱完学生两分钟说出关生日词汇动词短语)
    T Please say the words and verbal phrases about birthday as many as possible
    S2 Cake cut the cake
    S3 Candle blow the candle
    S4 Party hold a party

    3 (家庭作业)
    (根刚说关生日词汇动词短语 般时写篇关生日短文少50单词)
    T Write a passage about somebody’s birthday party using the simple past tense
    Example
    I had a birthday party 20 days ago I asked many friends to come to my home My parents bought lots of food and drinks for us They gave me different presents and birthday cards I loved them a lot
    It was my fourteenth birthday We put 14 candles on a big birthday cake Before I cut the cake I made a silent wish and blew the candles out in one breath Then we ate the birthday cake together After that we performed different programs We all enjoyed ourselves very much
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    There was a big birthday cake with 13 candles on it 句中介词on指蜡烛轻插蛋糕表面非深插入 in

















    Unit 7 The Birthday Party
    Topic 3 Everyone had a wonderful party
    Section D
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn the pronunciation of the past forms of the verbs ending with edd
    t d Id
    2 Review the past simple tense
    He performed some magic tricks
    I didn’t play video games at all
    Did you sing a song at the party Yes I did No I didn’t
    What time did you come back home last night Judy
    3 Review the regular and irregular past forms of verbs
    4 Review useful expressions
    (1)Did you hurt yourself
    (2)This way please
    (3)What happened to Michael at the party
    (4)How could you lie to me
    (5)Why did you come back so late
    (6)Why didn’t you tell me the truth
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    卡片图片录音机
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复单元重点词汇短语
    1 (头脑风暴教师根Topic 3中生日聚会庆祝程 运卡片图片提示 学生限定时间 运集体智慧 说出全部学知识)
    T According to the process of the birthday party let’s do a brainstorming First speak out the sentences of how to celebrate Kangkang’s birthday as many as possible Only one minute Go
    S1 Jane played the guitar and sang a song er…
    S2 Helen recited a Chinese poem
    S3 Kangkang performed kung fu and enjoyed the party
    S4 Tom performed some magic tricks
    S5 Maria performed ballet and played the piano…
    S6 …
    T Time is up Well done Let’s review together
    Ss Jane played the guitar and sang a song Maria played the piano and performed ballet

    T Second speak out the verbs or verbal phrases of Musical Chairs
    S7 Missed the chair fell down er…
    S8 Hurt himself couldn’t stand up washed his hands…
    T Good job
    2 (通男女生两组竞赛复动词式教师先出示规动词原形规动词原形卡片学生快速说出式答者分分组获胜)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间12分钟)
    练掌握规动词式变化规律呈现1 总结读音规
    1 (1)(总结动词式变化规律)
    T Stop here please I’ll ask one student to come to the blackboard S1 please come here
    (名学生站讲台 教师学生做动作 学生猜Did you…提问 教师问句转换成陈述句板书黑板 句子呈现动词式般规律:动词+ed)
    T Now one student does the action and other students guess what he did

    (S1做排球动作)
    S2 Did you play volleyball
    S1 Yes you are right
    T We can say He played volleyball

    play—played
    perform—performed
    T Who can tell me the rules of these verbs
    S3 词尾+ed
    T Very good Let’s go on
    (导入步)
    (2)(教师呈现两张图片 体现动词式第二种变化形式 e结尾动词+d)

    T Look at the two pictures and find out what they did
    S4 She danced
    S5 She recited a poem
    (教师板书dancedrecited问学生变化规律)
    dance—danced recite—recited
    T Yes And can you tell me the rules
    Ss 词尾+d
    (3)(板书例句呈现辅音字母+y结尾动词 学生解式变化规律 y变i+ed)
    He tries his best to learn English well
    T Please look at the sentence on the blackboard and see how to change it
    (学生熟悉 进行激烈讨 教师板书答案)
    He tries his best to learn English well
    →He tried his best to learn English well
    try—tried
    T Do you know the rules
    Ss Yes 变yi+ed
    (教师纠正 必须辅音字母+y结尾 变yi+ed)
    (4)(呈现stop plan等词学生猜测式然板书答案)
    T Guess the past forms of stop and plan
    stop—stopped plan—planned
    T Can you find the rules
    Ss双写+ed
    (教师强调必须重读闭音节末尾辅音字母时双写该辅音字母+ed)
    (5)(教师做动作 学生猜出动作动词短语 体现动词式特殊变化)
    T I do the action and you guess
    S6 Sang a songDid housework
    T Yes good Let’s sum up the rules
    (总结动词般式变化规律 板书呈现)
    ①词尾+ed ②e结尾 直接+d ③辅音+y y变i +ed ④重读闭音节结尾辅音字母双写该辅音字母+ed ⑤规变化
    2 (听1录音 注意动词式词尾edd发音种)
    T Let’s listen to the tape and pay attention to the pronunciation of the past forms of the verbs ending with edd
    3 (听1 读注意edd发音邻音关系)
    T Listen to 1 again and follow it Pay attention to the relationship between the pronunciation of –edd and that of the sound next to it
    4 (引导学生总结动词加ed读音规)
    T Look at the words please find out the rules of pronunciation Who can do it
    S1 清辅音结尾加ed读成t
    T Yes very good ed加清辅音结尾动词时 读tAny other rules
    S2 元音浊辅音结尾动词加ed读成d
    T You’re clever ed加元音浊辅音结尾动词时读成dWhat else
    S3 td结尾动词加ed读成Id
    T Great td音结尾动词加ed读成IdThe following statement may help you
    (板书发音规)
    元浊读d清读tt d面读Id
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    巩固1完成3
    1 (学生根学容 找出话题中出现规动词式)
    T Please find out the past forms of regular verbs in this topic Let’s begin
    2 (找式词尾edd发音进行分类 然朗读)
    T Please classify your words according to the pronunciation of verbs ending with edd Then read them
    (板书动词式)
    t danced missed washed liked
    d performed played
    id recited
    3 (听录音 完成3)
    T OK stop here Look at 3 please Let’s listen to the tape Then fill in the blanks with the information you hear Understand
    Ss Yes
    T Good Begin
    (播放录音)
    4 (听3 然核答案)
    T Let’s listen again After listening we will check the answers
    (播放录音)
    T OK Are you ready
    Ss Yes
    T Good Who can do the first one
    S1 Mary—Date May 22nd Activities cooked a special dinner for her mother at home
    T OK sit down please Is heshe right
    Ss Yes
    T What about Tom
    S2 …

    5 (学生分描述听关信息)
    T Please repeat the information you hear I’ll ask three students to do Now S4¬ …
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    练般时句型纳总结 完成4a 4b
    1 (两组做话 练疑问句教师提醒学生加yesterdaylast nighttwo days agothe next morningin 1995等表示时间状语)
    T Work in pairs make a conversation like this
    S1 Did you play the guitar last night
    S2 Yes I did
    S1 Did you recite a Chinese poem at the party
    S2 No I didn’t
    (学生两分钟时间准备)
    T I will give you two minutes to prepare Then I will ask some pairs to act out the conversations
    (学生准备话)
    T Time is up Stop here You two please
    S3 Did you play video games last Sunday
    S4 No I didn’t
    S3 Did you watch TV yesterday evening
    S4 Yes I did
    (两者角色相互转换 调练)

    2 (接龙游戏全班学生起立围成圆形 练时特殊疑问句提醒学生分be动词情态动词行动词式回答答案重复否淘汰出局)
    T Let’s play a game Begin like this
    S5 I played football yesterday What did you do
    S6 I watched TV Where were you last night
    S7 I was at home What could you do at the age of six
    S8 I could ride a bike

    T You are wonderful
    3 (学生通观察话游戏疑问句答语 纳总结般时法 黑板写出重点句型)
    T Let’s sum up the past simple tense Volunteers
    I played the guitarwas at home last nightcould ride a bike
    I didn’t play the guitarwasn’t at home last nightcouldn’t ride a bike
    Did you play the guitar Yes I did No I didn’t
    Were you… Yes I wasNo I wasn’t
    Could you… Yes I couldNo I couldn’t
    4 (完成4a4b)
    T Great Now please read 4a and 4b You should pay attention to these grammar focus and useful expressions
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间8分钟)
    通写作谈 提高学生语言综合运力探究力
    1 (根复容 学生分组完成2 学生解写信格式)
    T Suppose you are Kangkang write a letter back to your friend Lulu to describe your birthday party You may begin like the form in 2
    2 (组选出名代表 朗读写信 选出获胜组)
    T Now each group chooses your representative to read your letter and then we will choose the winner Which group wants to be the first
    G1 …

    T You’re all great But which group is the best Let’s give them marks
    (师生组分)
    Group 1 2 3 4 …
    Point
    T OK Let’s see the result Congratulations … is the winner
    3 (完成5学生描述次生日晚会)
    T In this unit we have learned about celebrating a birthday Can you describe your birthday party You can begin like this
    … is my birthday I had a birthday party I asked many friends to come to my home They sang the song Happy Birthday together for me…
    4 (家庭作业)
    (朋友笔友写封信介绍难忘次生日聚会 写信封) 新课标第网
    T Write a letter about your unforgettable birthday party to your friend or pen pal according to 5 and then write the envelope











    Unit 8 The Seasons and the Weather
    Topic 1 What’s the weather like in summer
    Section A
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 (1)Learn the new words about seasons
    spring summer fall winter
    (2)Learn other new words
    weather warm season hot cold rain snow ground
    2 Learn how to describe the weather
    What’s the weather like in spring It’s warm
    How is the weather in fall It’s cool
    When it snows the ground is all white and I can make snowmen
    3 Learn to use superlative forms to express preference about seasons
    Which season do you like best spring summer fall or winter
    I liked winter before but now I like summer best
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    图片黑板录音机
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复单元容导入课
    1 (复第7单元部分重点句型学生分成4组问题进行抢答组表现
    组获胜)
    T Now I’ll divide you into four groups I’ll ask you nine questions and you can answer my questions as quickly as possible The group that does best is the winner
    (1)When were you born
    (2)What’s the shape of your pencilbox
    (3)Where was she born(教师指着女孩问)
    (4)How longwide is it
    (5)Could you ride a bike one year ago
    (6)You can sing Happy Birthday in English What other English songs can you sing
    (7)Can you dance to disco or perform ballet
    (8)Did you sing a song yesterday
    (9)What time did you come to school this morning
    G1 …(组抢答)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间11分钟)
    呈现1a3a完成4
    1 (衔接复容师生话形式呈现1a3a)
    T Good There are four seasons in a year What are they
    S1 春夏秋冬
    (教师出图片教学夏天summer词)
    spring summer fall winter
    (样方法教学spring fall winter)
    (板书)
    (教师四季应图片粘贴词面)
    2 (教师指着春天图片)
    T Well There are four seasons in a year Look at this picture What season is it
    S3 It’s spring
    T Yes What’s the weather like in spring (教师板书句解释weather词义)
    What’s the weather like in spring
    Ss 暖
    T Yes Warm What do you often do in spring
    S4 I often fly kites
    How is the weather today
    T I think it’s a good season for flying kites
    3 (教师做动作 表示天气热)
    T How is the weather today(教师板书句)
    Ss 热
    T Yes it’s hot(方法解释hot)What do you often do in a hot day
    S5 I often go swimming
    T It’s a good time to go swimming In what season do we usually go swimming
    Ss In summer
    T Do you like summer
    Ss …
    4 (教师指着春夏秋冬图片)
    T Well done Now let’s look at these pictures Which season do you like best spring summer fall or winter I like winter best Because it’s cold When it snows the ground is all white and I can make snowmen
    What about you Do you like winter S6
    S6 No I don’t I like fall because fall is the harvest season and I can eat many different kinds of fruits
    T You can also climb hills
    Which season do you like best
    T Very good Now we know it’s hot in summer it’s cold in winter it’s warm in spring and it’s cool in fall
    (板书)

    weather warm hot cold cool snowman
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间6分钟)
    巩固1a 掌握语音语调
    1 (放1a录音 学生读 铅笔标出重读语调)
    T Follow the tape and mark the stress and intonation with your pencil
    2 (学生擦标重读语调 先读 然录音起读 逐句核语音语调)
    T Rub them out read by yourselves and then follow the tape to check your pronunciation and intonation sentence by sentence Ready Go
    3 (机话)
    T Suppose you are AB listen to the tape and make a dialog with BA
    4 (角色表演:教师4名学生讲台前 分扮演4季节介绍季节天气情况适应季节活动)
    T Now Let’s act I will ask four students to stand here and act the four seasons Suppose you are one of the four seasons Please introduce your characters You can say it like this
    I’m spring It’s warm in my season …
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间15分钟)
    练1b 完成2 3a3b
    1 (季节应天气活动连线)
    T Finish 1b Match the seasons with the weather and activities
    (请学生连线部分组成句子朗读)
    T Make sentences according to 1b and then read them out You can do it like this
    It’s warm in spring We can fly kites
    2 (名学生脱离书说出喜爱季节说明原)
    T Now I’ll ask some students to tell us which season they like best Why Who will have a try
    Example
    I like…best Because I can…
    3 (听2录音 填表格 完成2)
    T Now listen to the tape and complete the table in 2 by yourselves
    (听完录音 教师核答案)
    (名学生复述录音容)
    T I’ll ask some students to retell what you heard

    Name
    Favorite season
    Reason
    Jane


    Kangkang



    rain snow ground
    5 (学生听3a录音 读表演3a)
    T Good job Now listen to the tape again and read after it Then I’ll ask some students to act out the dialog
    6 (教师指着关春夏秋冬图片 学生两组做话完成3b)
    T Look at the pictures Work in pairs and practice like this
    S1 Which season do you like best
    S2 I like…best
    S1 Why do you like…
    S2 Because it’s a good time …Because we can …
    S1 What’s the weather like in…
    S2 It’s…
    7 (学生歌谣形式描述四季然选择份全班起操练)
    T Please write something about seasons as a chant Then we’ll chant the best ones together
    法制教育:



    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间8分钟)
    通活动 巩固应学功语
    1 (组活动全班分成四组 两分钟说出描述四季节句子限定时间 说出句子组获胜)
    T Now I’ll divide you into four groups Please say the sentences that can describe four seasons in two minutes and the group that says the most sentences is the winner
    Example
    G1 Spring is warm It’s a good season for flying kites …
    G2 We can go swimming in summer…
    G3 It’s a good time to climb mountains in fall…
    G4 It’s cold in winter…
    2 (家庭作业)
    (调查朋友四季节里常做什运动 制成张表格 然表格写篇短文)
    T Survey the activities your friends often do in the four seasons then complete the table below and write a passage according to the table
    Name
    Activity
    Spring
    Summer
    Fall
    Winter














































    Unit 8 The Seasons and the Weather
    Topic 1 What’s the weather like in summer
    Section B
    The main activities are 1a and 2a 课重点活动1a2a
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 (1)Learn adjectives about weather
    cloudy snowy rainy windy foggy bright
    (2)Learn other new words
    temperature low
    2 Talk about the weather
    —How is the weather there
    —It’s rainy today But it was sunny and warm yesterday
    3 Learn how to understand weather reports
    —What’s the temperature do you know
    —The low temperature is 8℃ and the high temperature is 2℃
    法制教育:


    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    图片天气预报简图录音机卡片黑板
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间4分钟)
    导入1a
    (方案:根节课布置家庭作业找名学生展示根调查结果写短文)
    S1 Liu Mei is my good friend She likes spring best Because spring is warm She can go hikingfly kites
    S2 Wang Lan is my friend She often goes swimming in summer Because summer is hot
    S3 Li Yan is my good friend She says she likes fall best Because fall is cool She can climb hills
    S4 Wen Wei is my best friend She often makes snowmen in winter Because there is much snow in winter

    T What about Jane Do you know
    (方案二:教师提问节课重点知识)
    T Boys and girls we learned some words about the weather last lesson Now who can answer the question Which season do you like best spring summer fall or winter and why
    S1 I like spring best because it’s warm
    S2 I like summer best because it is hot
    S3 I like fall best because it is cool
    S4 I like winter best because it is cold
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间13分钟)
    呈现1a2a学询问天气句型掌握表示天气形容词
    1 (教师手指着窗外)
    T How is the weather todaySs It’s raining
    T Right It is rainy today(转入般时)
    T Today is Tuesday What day was it yesterdaySs It was Monday
    T How was the weather yesterdaySs It was 雪
    T Yes It was snowy
    (运样方法分教学It was foggyIt was sunnyIt was windyIt was cloudy)
    (教师分出示雪雾晴朗风云雨图片师生互动)
    (板书相关名词形容词领读)
    rain—rainy cloud—cloudy snow—snowy
    sun—sunny wind—windy fog—foggy

    (1)How is the weather there
    (2)What is Michael doing
    2 (呈现1a理解容找出关键词句)
    (1)(黑板呈现听力问题)
    T Now listen to 1a and answer the questions on the small blackboard
    (2)(核答案)
    T OK let’s check the answers together
    3 (听录音1a铅笔标出重音语调)
    T Follow the tape and mark the stress and intonation with your pencil
    4 (学生听1a录音核重音语调然读 两组表演)
    T Now listen to 1a follow it and practice in pairs then I will choose some pairs to act it out
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    完成1b1c巩固表示天气功语
    1 (图 听1b录音 完成1b)
    T Look at the pictures in 1b Match the words with the correct pictures then listen and number the words in the order you hear them
    (放1b录音 分钟核答案)
    T Are you ready Let’s check the answers together
    Ss 3—cloudy—a 1—snowy—e 6—rainy—c 5—windy—f 2—foggy—b 4—sunny—d
    T Yes good You are right
    2 (完成1c两组表演话)
    T Work in pairs Make conversations that are similar to 1a with the words and phrases in the form in 1c
    bright
    S1 How is the weather today
    S2 It’s nice and bright
    (板书)
    S1 What was the weather like yesterdayS2 It was sunny
    S1 What did you doS2 I flew a kite…
    3 (话结束 通做游戏巩固复教师事先准备1c中单词短语卡片分发学生 学生组单词短语组成句子朗读先完成组获胜组)
    T Now let’s play a game I’ll give you some cards There are some words or phrases on the cards Please join them into sentences and then read them The group which finishes it first will be the winner You can do it like this
    (1) It’s nice and bright today We are flying kites But yesterday it was sunnyrainy
    (2) Yesterday it was rainy But today it is nice and bright we can fly kites
    (3) Today it is nice and bright Yesterday it was rainy but we flew kites
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间8分钟)
    完成2b3练天气温度表达法
    1.(完成2b)
    T OK All of you did a good job Let’s look at the picture in 2b and answer my questions
    What’s the weather like in Toronto
    Ss It’s snowy
    T What’s the temperature
    Ss It’s from 10℃ to 4℃(教师适帮助学生表达)
    (完成 学生分两组讨华盛顿区天气情况然根天气预报信息完成城市讨)

    Hefei Nanchang Xiamen

    2℃5℃ 0℃11℃ 9℃15℃
    G1 How is the weather in Washington DC
    G2 It’s cloudy
    G1 What’s the temperature
    G2 It’s from 8℃ to 2℃
    (板书)
    Toronto Washington DC
    法制教育:

    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通活动掌握天气功语
    1 (轻松刻)
    T Boys and girls let’s do an activity together Please look at 4 and let’s read the rhyme The Light Rain together
    (家起朗读 然分组赛)
    T Now let’s read in groups and see which group is the best
    G1 …
    G2 …

    (师生起评定组)
    T Now which group is the best
    Ss Group…
    T OK I hope you are all the best next time

    Unit 8 The Seasons and the Weather
    Topic 1 What’s the weather like in summer
    Section C
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    hometown if trip wear holiday travel had better(do sth) find out umbrella go out Australia remember most part sun shine shorts later on be different from passage arrive take a walk Beijing Opera right away ourselves hope
    2 Learn how to make suggestions for traveling
    You’d better find out the weather in different places in August
    You need to take an umbrella when you go out
    August is the best time to go there
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机张世界天气预报图旅行包顶太阳帽副太阳镜雨伞条冬天毛围巾架相机
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    学句型学生询问天气情况复般现时般时温度表达法
    T Boys and girls what’s the weather like today
    S1 It is …
    T What’s the temperature do you know
    S2 The low temperature is…and the high temperature is…
    T What do you think of the weather yesterday
    S3 It was…
    T What was the temperature yesterday do you know
    Ss The high temperature was…and the low temperature was…
    T I think it is a good time to travel Do you like traveling
    Ss Yes we do
    T Good I like traveling too Summer holidays are coming(处现进行时表示般时学生解) If you plan to go traveling where do you want to go
    S1 …
    T Why
    S1 Because …
    T Good idea But there are more places to travel
    (引入课话题选择里度假注意问题)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    呈现1a
    (第步导入1a)
    1 (老师提出问题学生分组讨)
    T Discuss the questions in groups If you go on a trip to Shanghai in August what will you wear
    (板书教学生词)
    if trip wear
    (分钟名学生代表组发表意见)
    T OK who can make a report S1 …
    (呈现板书部分生词)
    sunglasses shorts umbrella
    2 (呈现1a学生阅读1a短文划出文中生词词组)
    T Please read the passage in 1a and underline the new words and phrases
    (板书生词词组重点句子解释法)
    find out You’d better find out the weather in different places in August
    go out You need to take an umbrella when you go out
    Australia
    most Please remember to wear warm clothes
    part
    sun It rains suddenly
    shine
    later on
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    完成1a1b进步理解巩固表示天气功语
    1 (放1a录音 学生读 铅笔标出重读语调)
    T Now please listen to 1a and follow it and mark the stress and intonation with your pencils
    2 (学生擦标重读语调 先读 然读 核语音语调)
    T Now rub them out and read 1a by yourselves and then follow the tape to check your
    pronunciation and intonation sentence by sentence Go
    (学生开始阅读板书求学生掌握be different frompassage)
    (板书)
    be different from passage
    3 (根1a容回答1b问题)
    T Now let’s answer the questions in 1b Who will answer the first question

    4 (根黑板呈现关键词词组句子复述1a)
    T Look at the key words phrases and sentences on the blackboard Retell 1a according to them
    (板书)
    plan to — had better — In England — need to
    In Australia — the best time — remember to
    In most parts of China — need to
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    练1c 巩固关句型完成2
    1 (通问答 学生旅行情况已致解 进入1c 学生讨里度假原
    )
    2 (呈现完成2)
    T Now here is a letter from Michael Last Saturday he and his friends went on a trip to Beihai Park and they had a good time Later on he wrote a letter to his mother about that Let’s read the letter and then complete the letter with the proper forms of the given verbs Then check the statements that are true
    (教师指导学生完成2教学生词arrive Beijing Opera ourselves hope)
    (板书)
    arrive Beijing Opera ourselves hope
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    根天气预报图实际情况进行表演增强学生应力
    1 (教师黑板挂世界天气预报图时出准备道具放讲台)
    T Very good Now let’s play a game If you are going for your holidays here are the weather reports on February 20th for some big cities in the world and here are the things you have to take when you travel Please work in groups of three
    The first student tells the class hisher favorite place to travel
    The second one makes a weather report for himher
    The third one makes suggestions
    (请组学生世界天气预报图进行表演全班学生观核活动情况否真实)
    T Now Group 1 please act out the dialog
    (学生开始进入角色)
    S3 My favorite place to travel is Washington DC
    S4 It’s sunny and hot
    S5 You should wear your sunglasses
    S3 OK Thank you
    (S3戴太阳镜背旅行包准备出发)
    T Very good
    (继续游戏)
    2 (家庭作业)
    (朋友想城市旅行 想解城市天气情况请根节课学知识出建议完成3)
    T Your friend wants to go on a trip to a big city Try to find some information about the weather there And give himher some suggestions using what we have learned
    Example
    It is sunnyhot…in BeijingShanghai…You can wear sunglasses and shorts…





    Unit 8 The Seasons and the Weather
    Topic 1 What’s the weather like in summer
    Section D
    ⅠAims and demands目标求
    1Learn some new words and phrases
    everything come back to life come out be busy doing sth leaf wind report
    2Learn some useful expressions about the seasons
    Everything comes back to life
    Trees turn green and flowers come out
    It often rains and sometimes it rains heavily
    It’s cool and the leaves fall from the trees
    The wind blows strongly and sometimes it snows
    3Talk about the weather and temperature
    Beijing is sunny
    The high temperature is 10℃ and the low temperature is 2℃
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机挂图天气图片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间10分钟)
    复询问天气功语
    1 (教师询问值日生天日期天气 引出关天气句型 然询问学生3a3b句型进行全面复)
    T Who is on duty today
    S1 I am
    T What’s the date today
    S1 It’s June 2nd
    T What’s the weather like today
    S1 It’s sunnycloudyrainysnowywindyfoggy(利图片引导学生说出话题中词尾变化形成形容词)
    (板书关天气形容词)
    cloudy rainy snowy
    windy foggy sunny
    (学生指出部分名词变形容词规接着指出形容词变副词规)
    (板书关副词)
    brightly strongly
    suddenly heavily
    (教师继续提问名学生 询问气温)
    T Sit down please Thank you Then next what’s the temperature do you know
    S2 The low temperature is 20℃ The high temperature is 25℃
    T Now Let’s congratulate the winners(学生获胜者鼓掌)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间11分钟)
    呈现1a 完成1b掌握描述四季差异表达方法
    1 (年四季节 季节间肯定会处 底处呢?呈现1a
    阅读文章 标出描述四季节处关键词)
    T Boys and girls there are four seasons in a year But they are different Now read 1a by yourselves Please find out what we can use to describe the four seasons and make notes according to the passage Then finish 1b I’ll give you five minutes to finish it
    (学生阅读做笔记 教师巡视 发现速度慢学生 教师指点)
    2 (时间 核答案根学生回答 板书导出新单词)
    T Time is up Let’s check the answers
    Spring—March April May—get warm come back to life
    Summer—June July August—hot often rain
    Fall—September October November—cool harvest be busy harvesting leaves fall
    Winter—December January February—cold wind sometimes snow warm clothes


    Season

    3 (播放录音 学生读)
    T Listen to the tape and follow it
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间6分钟)
    巩固1a 学会复述短文
    (学生通阅读1a文章 做1b练 已四季差异致解现根做笔记 课文复述短文 时教师四季图挂黑板 学生着四季图面板书容回忆复述)
    T Good Now please retell the passage according to your own notes You can also get help from the pictures and the key words on the blackboard
    S1 In China spring returns and many things come back to life in March The weather gets warm
    It is a wonderful season Summer begins in June It is very hot The leaves fall from the trees
    in fall and the farmers are busy harvesting Then winter comes It lasts from December to
    February We all wear warm clothes The wind blows strongly Sometimes it snows
    T Very good Now S2 please retell the passage again
    S2 …

    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    掌握季节功语 进行知识拓展
    1 (学生通复述 已掌握四季间差异现进步探讨现实生活中四季间差异学生分成春夏秋冬四组 春天组讨春天关话题夏天组讨夏天关话题 类推教师旁边观指点讨程中组学生相关讨结果写黑板然组做)
    T Good Now can you find out more differences in different seasons I will divide you into four groups Each group stands for one season Please discuss and write your answers down on the blackboard Let’s see which group does the best
    Group 1 please write down the sentences describing spring
    Group 2 please write and tell us what summer is like
    Group 3 please work for fall
    Group 4 please describe how winter is different from others
    Ss OK
    (活动结果板书)
    Spring
    Summer
    Fall
    Winter
    (1)It’s warm
    (1)It’s hot
    (1)It’s cool
    (1)It’s cold
    (2)It’s from March to
    May
    (2)It’s from June to
    August
    (2)It’s from
    September to
    November
    (2)It’s from December
    to February
    (3)It’s a good season
    for flying kites
    (3)It’s a good season
    for swimming
    (3)It’s a good season
    for climbing
    mountains
    (3)It’s a good season
    for making snowmen
    (4)It’s often sunny
    (4)It often rains
    (4)It is often windy
    (4)It sometimes snows
    (5)Spring is green
    (5)Summer is bright
    (5)Fall is yellow
    (5)Winter is white
    (6)I can fly kites
    (6)I can wear
    sunglasses and shorts
    (6)I can eat apples
    (6)I can skate
    (7)It is a wonderful
    season
    (7)I can go to the
    beach
    (7)We can go
    traveling
    (7)We can wear warm
    clothes
    (8)We can wear light
    clothes
    (8)We can have
    summer holidays
    (8)We can begin our
    new term
    (8)We can have
    winter holidays
    (9)Trees come back to
    life
    (9)The high
    temperature can be
    39℃ sometimes
    (9)We can eat
    different kinds of
    fruits
    (9)The low
    temperature can be
    17℃ sometimes
    (10)The temperature is
    not too high or too low
    (10)Sometimes it
    rains heavily
    (10)Leaves begin to
    fall from the trees
    (10)Farmers are not
    busy
    (导入步)
    2 (面活动转入2请学根2信息写天气预报适进行扩展)
    T Boys and girls we do different sports in different seasons But before we go out we’d better know the weather Do you know how to write a weather report Now please look at 2 and try your best to write a weather report according to the information
    (写完老师点名学生朗读写天气预报作适讲解)
    T OK Now let’s ask some students to read their weather reports S1 …
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间8分钟)
    利学知识 学会表达季节喜
    1 (季节天气 进行活动进入组讨 谈季节里服装穿戴进行活动)
    T Good We know in different seasons we wear different clothes and do different sports Now work in groups and discuss what kind of clothes you wear and what sports you do in different seasons
    (学生开始讨 2分钟学生汇报)
    T Now can I share your ideas
    S1 I like wearing coats in winter and I like skating
    S2 I like wearing Tshirts in fall and I like climbing mountains
    S3 …

    2 (家庭作业)
    (写篇短文 描述季节喜欢衣服运动)
    T Write a passage about your favorite clothes and sports in different seasons
    Example
    In spring light clothes are my favourite and it’s a good season to fly kites But I like wearing sunglasses and shorts in summer I often go swimming with my friends In fall climbing mountains and cool clothes are my favourite In winter I often wear warm clothes It’s a good season for making snowmen and going skating
    学困生辅导:
    教反思:























    Unit 8 The Seasons and the Weather
    Topic 2 The summer holidays are coming
    Section A
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    get together places of interest India
    2 Talk about future plans and intentions
    I want to go to Canada
    I plan to go to Australia
    I wish to travel around the country and take some pictures
    I hope to get together with them
    I’d like to visit some places of interest in China
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    世界图录音机图片卡片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复导入1a
    1 (班级活动复巩固节课容)
    T Good morning boys and girls Now let’s begin our class First let’s chant together Turn to page 86 Read 4 by yourselves Try to understand it
    2 (班级起唱三次 然分男女组唱齐唱 活跃课堂气氛)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    呈现1a 理解话容
    1 (听1a录音 找出计划旅游目通听力训练培养学生获取信息处理信息力)
    T Listen to 1a find out their favorite places to visit
    S1 Kangkang wants to go to Canada
    S2 Michael plans to go to Australia
    S3 Maria wants to go back to Cuba
    S4 Jane would like to visit some places of interest in China
    T Well done Each of them has a good plan for the holidays I hope they all have a good time
    2 (学生声读录音 进行机话)
    T Now listen again please read after the tape and then make a dialog with the tape
    (教师纠正错误发音讲解文中知识点)
    3 (教师板书表格黑板)
    T Listen again and then complete the form
    Name
    Where to go
    What to do
    Kangkang
    Canada

    Michael
    Australia
    He wishes to travel around the country and take some pictures
    Maria
    Cuba
    She wants to celebrate her birthday with her family and old
    friends
    Jane
    China
    She would like to visit some places of interest
    (填表格根表格练话 直表格进行话)
    T After finishing it practice the conversation in 1a with your partner with the help of the words and sentences in the form
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间5分钟)
    巩固1a掌握重点句型
    1 (组活动四组 扮演康康 扮演简 扮演迈克尔 扮演玛丽亚表演1a话)
    T Now let’s work in groups of four One acts as Kangkang one Jane one Michael another Maria Act out the dialog in 1a
    2 (桌练完成1b)
    T Read 1a again and match the pictures with the children
    3 (复巩固重点句型分四组 举行造句赛完成1c)
    T In 1a there are five important structures as follows
    I want to go to Canada
    I plan to go to Australia I wish to travel around the country and take some pictures
    I want to go back to Cuba I hope to get together with them
    I would like to visit some places of interest in China
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间15分钟)
    T Listen to the dialog and check (√) the correct answers in 3
    (核答案)
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    拓展练 增强学生语言运力
    1 (挂出世界图学生找出国家具体位置学会英语表达国家名称)
    2 (弹性课堂学生发挥 世界图 谈熟悉国家特色 包括风俗惯文化等)
    T Talk about your favorite country
    Ss All right
    Example
    My favorite country is China It is large It has many places of interest They are the Great Wall Tian’anmen Square and so on Chinese food tastes good Chinese people are friendly Chinese clothes are beautiful Some big cities such as Beijing Xi’an Kunming are beautiful too Chinese national flag is the red flag with five stars
    Australia is a big country The weather is sunny and dry It is very rich It has many sheep When China is in summer it is winter in Australia While it is winter in China it is summer in Australia Only Australia has kangaroos in the world Australians like outdoor sports all the year round
    3 (组活动学生讨份假日计划 写段文章文章容包括时间点员行程计划旅行需物品)
    T Work in groups of four discuss and make a plan for your holidays Then write a short passage Please pay attention to the time the place the people the travel plan and the things needed
    4 (写作练)
    (搜集国家情况写成短文课学间互相交流)
    T Collect information about different countries and write a short passage
    法制教育:


    5 (家庭作业)
    (熟读学话预新课)
    T Read the dialog in 1a as much as possible and preview Section B
    附录(图片)














    Ⅳ疑点探究
    hopewish表示希意 说hope to do sth wish to do sth hopehope sb to do sth外wish面句表示种难实现愿 常虚拟语气 :I wish that I could fly

















    Unit 8 The Seasons and the Weather
    Topic 2 The summer holidays are coming
    Section B
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    all (the) year round sound expensive camera a pair of tent raincoat
    2 (1)Learn how to make suggestions
    —What places should I visit in Yunnan
    —You should visit Dali and Lijiang And you shouldn’t miss Xishuangbanna
    —What should I take with me
    —You’d better take a camera a pair of sunglasses a map and so on
    (2)Review how to make future plans
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机世界图旅行物品图片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案

    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间4分钟)
    复关国家位置 引出文
    1 (利头脑风暴法复节课关国家图容)
    T I’ll show you some pictures one by one Please tell me the countries’ names and point out
    their positions on the map Give me your answers as quickly as you can Are you ready
    T KangaroosS1 Australia Here On the map
    (学生图准确指出位置)
    T The Big BenS2 England Here London is its capital
    T The World CupS3 Brazil
    T Washington DCS4 The capital of the United States It is here on the map
    T MariaS5 Cuba Maria’s hometown
    T Benz carsS6 Germany
    T The neighbor of AmericaS7 Canada
    T The Great WallS8 China
    T The flag with the sun on it
    S9 Japan It’s here on the map
    2 (学生介绍拟订假日计划)
    T Now I’ll ask some of you to talk about your holiday plans
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    呈现1a理解话容
    1 (展示1a图片展开话学1a掌握sound expensive camera解all (the) year round a pair of)
    T Good Boys and girls Now please look at these pictures Are they beautiful
    Ss Yes they are
    T I plan to go to these places this summer holiday Do you know where they are
    Ss Yes they are in Yunnan
    T How do you know
    SsThere are words 石林 in the picture They are places of interest in our country
    T Yes Would you like to know more about the three places of interest
    Ss Certainly we’d like to
    T OK Please read 1a and find out Zhou Weilun’s descriptions of the three places
    Ss OK
    (学生边读边找答案)
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间9分钟)巩固1a完成1b
    1 (放1a录音学生读铅笔标出重读语调)
    T Follow the tape and mark the stress and intonation with your pencil
    2 (标重读语调先读然擦标重读语调录音起读逐句核语音语调)
    T According to the mark of the stress and intonation read 1a by yourselves Then rub them out and follow the tape to check your pronunciation and intonation sentence by sentence Ready Go
    3 (完成1b)T According to 1a complete the table in 1b please(核答案)
    4 (两组表演话) T Work in pairs and then act out the dialog
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间12分钟)
    练完成23a
    1 (教师暑假云南旅游线呼应1a导出2)
    T Boys and girls I plan to go to Yunnan this summer holiday Would you like to tell me what I should take with me
    Ss Certainly You’d better take a camera a pair of sunglasses a map and so on
    T Thank you very much If you plan to go to Beijing What would you like to take with you And please tell us your reasons
    S1 I plan to take an MP4 If I want to relax or have nothing to do I can listen to music
    S2 I want to bring water with me because the water is expensive on the train
    S3 A camera I can use it to take pictures
    S4 I would like to take an umbrella or a raincoat Maybe it rains
    S5 Maybe it’s hot I want to take my sunglasses
    S6 The first thing I want to take is a bag It is so necessaryuseful
    (果学生没谈tentraincoat教师呈现板书)
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    拓展练增强学生语言运力
    1 (根3a完成3b提高学生写作力)
    T OK We have discussed and answered all of these questions Now please write a short passage according to 3a
    2 (家庭作业)
    (1)(学生通网查图书搜集国家风俗)
    (2)(昆明——春城例 学生搜集国名城称 英语表达增强学生学兴趣)
    Example Kunming—the Spring City
    Harbin—the Ice City
    Chongqing—the Mountain City
    Zigong—the Salt City
    Guangzhou—the Sheep City
    Unit 8 The Seasons and the Weather
    Topic 2 The summer holidays are coming
    Section C
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    enter take off wet point to touch finger lucky money paper pass during May Day stay
    2 Review the expressions of making suggestions with should shouldn’t
    3 Learn different customs in different countries
    In Japan when you enter someone’s home you should take off your shoes
    In Brazil people never go out with their hair wet
    In Indonesia you mustn’t point to anything with your foot
    Don’t touch a child on the head in Thailand
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机挂图
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    通课堂活动复相关国家名称步引出相应风俗惯做铺垫
    1 (老师提问学生回答引出面活动)
    T Boys and girls do you have many friends in your life
    Ss Yes we do
    T Where are they from
    S1 My friend is from Shanghai
    S2 My friend is from Sichuan
    S3 My friend is from Changsha

    T I see Your friends are all from China Do you want to make friends with foreigners
    Ss Yes we do
    2 (课堂活动课前找四学生分扮成日巴西印度尼西亚泰国四国家教师纸制作四幅相应国旗图案 学生戴胸前 分代表四国家)
    T Today some foreigners come to our class Let’s make friends with them Can you guess which countries they come from
    (学生争相猜测)Ss Japan …
    (教师帮助学生识)
    T OK Stop here Now we know they come from Japan Brazil Indonesia and Thailand
    (教师领读国家名词提问方式学生简单解国家然渡环节)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间8分钟)
    学生展示1b中图片学生带着兴趣解述四国家风俗惯
    1 (呈现1b图片讲解生词)
    T Now S1 what’s the man in Picture C doing
    S1 He is 摸 a boy’s head
    T Yes touch He’s touching the boy’s head Well let’s look at Picture A The young woman is entering a house She doesn’t take off her shoes and feels sorry Now look at Picture B What about the woman’s hair S2
    S2 湿
    T You’re right It’s wet Does the man in Picture D perform a good manner
    Ss No
    T What is he doing
    S3 He is pointing to the TV with his foot I think he shouldn’t do it like that
    T Good Different countries have different customs Now let’s come to 1a
    (教师边说边识图序板书)
    touch enter take off wet point to
    2 (呈现1a学生阅读1a短文 回答问题)
    T Please read the passage in 1a and try to answer the questions
    (教师准备写问题纸条请名学生抽出张纸条朗读纸条问题请名学生根短文容回答纸条问题)
    (1) Are the customs the same in different countries
    (2) Should you take off your shoes when you enter someone’s home in Japan
    (3) Can people go out with their hair wet in Brazil
    (4) Can you point to anything with your foot in Indonesia
    (5) In Thailand can people touch a child on the head
    3 (播放1a录音 学生读)
    T Please listen to 1a and follow it
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)巩固1a完成1b
    1 (学生根关键词复述短文)
    T Please complete the following table and then retell the passage according to the key words on the blackboard
    (板书)
    Country
    Custom
    Japan
    should
    shouldn’t

    Brazil

    Indonesia

    Thailand

    Ss Different countries have different customs You should take off your shoes when you enter
    someone’s home in Japan…
    2 (学生完成1b活动)
    T Let’s match the countries with the right pictures and fill in the blanks in 1b…
    3 (Talk and guess教师安排学生代表国家 谈国家风俗 学生猜国家)
    T Here are some people from different countries They are talking about their customs Can you guess where they are from Start
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间13分钟)
    练完成1c2 3a3b
    1 (组活动全班分组 学生You shouldshouldn’t…介绍家乡风俗 完成1c)
    T We have our own customs For example we should eat two red eggs on our birthdays We shouldn’t point to the moon on Midautumn night Please tell us some other customs with
    You shouldshouldn’t…
    S1 You should…S2 You shouldn’t……
    2 (学生听3a录音初步感知3a容然阅读回答问题)
    T Now please listen to 3a and then answer the questions
    (板书)
    (1)When did Maria go to Sichuan with her family
    (2)How was Maria’s trip
    (3)Were the people there friendly
    (4)How did Maria travel there
    (5)How long did Maria stay there
    (6)Where did Maria and her family visit
    (7)What does Maria think of the food there
    (8)Is the food very different from hers
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间9分钟)
    加强实践活动体验国民俗风情
    1 (组活动学生说出国家俗组学修改补充组学生说全面流利)
    T We learned different countries have different customs Please tell us some
    Ss In Japan… In Brazil……
    2 (讲场景片断 学生判断行)
    T I’ll describe some scenes Please tell me who is right or who is wrong and why Now listen to me carefully
    Kumiko came back from school She entered her home with her shoes Mr Green is eating lunch with chopsticks at home in England Mr Lee likes children He touched a child on the head when he was in Thailand Lucy had a party and her friends went to the party early(学生做判断 回答)
    T Please tell me who is right or who is wrong Why
    S1 Kumiko is wrong She should take off her shoes
    S2 Mr Green is wrong He shouldn’t eat with chopsticks
    S3 Mr Lee is wrong He shouldn’t touch a child on the head in Thailand
    S4 Lucy’s friends are wrong They should go to the party on time or a little late
    3 (家庭作业)
    (学生写篇关国家风俗惯短文学生通网图书馆查资料获信息)
    T Write a passage about the different customs in different countries You can search on the Internet or in the library We’ll share your composition next class
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    OK 手势美国部分国家表示 意利表示种令厌恶污秽手势
    Unit 8 The Seasons and the Weather
    Topic 2 The summer holidays are coming
    Section D
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    greeting the day before yesterday make money
    2 Review How questions and Whquestions in the past simple tense and the past forms of verbs
    How was your trip to Lijiang
    Where did you go on holiday
    How did you travel to England
    When did you go on the trip
    3 (1)Learn how to write a postcard about travel
    (2)Go on talking about customs and cultures in foreign countries
    Ⅱ Teaching aids教具
    录音机
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review第步 复(时间11分钟)
    师生话复4a4b学生总结完成3
    1 (问候检查作业询问日期引出部分生词短语复4a)
    T Good morning class
    Ss Good morning teacher
    T Boys and girls thanks for your greetings
    T Now let’s share some of your compositions Who’d like to read one
    S1 Let me have a try We learned different countries have different customs In Japan … In Brazil …
    T Good job But what’s the date today
    Ss It’s…
    T What was the date yesterday
    Ss It was…
    T What was the date the day before yesterday
    Ss It was…
    (继续问明天天板书画线部分)
    greeting the day before yesterday
    (板书)
    wantplanwishhopewould like to
    (指着行板书开展话)
    T OK Look at the blackboard please Let’s make a free talk with the phrases Do you plan to go to Australia this summer holiday
    S1 Yes I do
    S2 No I want to go to …
    S3 No I wish to travel around the country and take pictures
    S4 No I hope to…
    S5 No I’d like to visit some places of interest in China
    S6 …
    (请学生两组词词组分造句)
    Where
    How
    + did +语+v原形 + …
    What time
    Who
    When
    What
    特殊疑问词+助动词式+语+动词原形 + ……?
    2 (学生认真观察问句 发现问句时态结构)
    T Please pay attention to the questions Let’s find out the rules
    Ss They’re the past simple tense (果学生回答困难 教师帮助学生回答)
    (请学生黑板句式结构补充完整)
    T Look and complete the structures on the blackboard
    (板书)
    Where
    How

    + +语+ + …

    (教师黑板汉字标出句式结构点)



    (请学生句式结构造句)
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间10分钟)
    完成1复般时学英语贺卡书写格式
    1 (完成1中明信片)
    T Jack went to New York the day before yesterday He wanted to send a postcard to his friend Cao Yan Please help him to complete the postcard
    (1)明确格式标记贺卡标记书写
    (2)制贺卡正面分写收信发信姓名住址格式英文信封相反面称呼语贺文签名三部分组成
    ①称呼卡片左方顶格书写
    ②贺文写中间第行顶格空35字符距离开始书写
    ③祝贺签名写卡片右方
    Example
    To Mum and Dad
    Greetings from Beijing
    I enjoy myself every day …
    Yours
    Jack
    Dear teacher
    Happy Teachers’ Day
    With love from Jack


    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间8分钟)
    巩固1 掌握关表述
    1 (根短文1容提问 复般时特殊疑问句形式贺卡书写格式)
    T Now please answer my questions When did Jack get to New York
    Ss He got to New York the day before yesterday
    T What did he rentSs He rented a car
    T Did he travel around the city Ss Yes he did
    T Where did he visitSs He visited Chinatown in New York
    T What did he buy for Cao Yan’s sister
    Ss He bought a beautiful skirt for her
    2 (黑板呈现关键词 学生根关键词复述贺卡容)
    got—rented—traveled—visited—bought
    T Who can use the key words to retell the story
    S1 Jack got to New York the day before yesterday He rented a car…
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间9分钟)
    练完成2
    1 (学生说明英语国家国俗)
    T Now Jack is in New York He knows different countries have different customs For example in China when we meet our friends we often greet with吃没? ? 里? Can we greet an Englishman like this
    Ss Ha Ha No
    2 (播放2录音 学生根听力容 做出选择)
    T We know in Englishspeaking countries we can’t ask such questions as we do in China Because it’s impolite Please listen to 2 and mark them with P for polite or I for Impolite
    3 (核答案)
    T If we askDo you have any brothers or sisters is it polite or impolite
    Ss Polite
    T Is it polite or impolite to ask the questionHow much money do you make per month
    Ss …
    4 (听录音2学生简述2)
    T Now listen to 2 again and try to retell some of it
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间7分钟)
    1 (猜猜六组学生分组描述代表性方 组学生猜什方组学生少信息猜)
    T Work in groups of six Group A describes something about the place he or she has visited The other groups guess where it is The group which can guess the right place with the fewest words will be the winner
    2 (家庭作业)
    (学生假设正度假然朋友写张贺卡 告诉旅游 做活动完成5)
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    Please give my love to your parents 意请代父母问说Please remember me to your parents







    Unit 8 The Seasons and the Weather
    Topic 3 Let’s celebrate
    Section A
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 (1)Learn the names of festivals
    Spring Festival Christmas Lantern Festival Thanksgiving Easter Midautumn Festival
    (2)Learn some other new words
    dumpling sweet luck riddle pie not … until believe full moon
    2 Talk about holidays and festivals
    Chinese people eat dumplings and perform lion and dragon dances
    People in many countries celebrate Christmas and give each other presents
    On the Lantern Festival people eat sweet dumplings for good luck
    On Thanksgiving many people eat turkey and pumpkin pie
    ⅡTeaching aids 教具
    录音机日历图片黑板万年历
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间8分钟)
    复日期表达 引入节日
    1 (复日期表达询问生日呈现农历日期表达)
    T Boys and girls what’s the date today Do you knowSs It’s June 6th
    T Whose birthday is it todayS1 It’s mine
    T Boys and girls let’s say Happy Birthday to S1 togetherSs Happy Birthday
    T After class we’ll give you some presentsS1 Thank you very much
    T Do you know when my birthday is GuessS2 October 1stS3 December 20th
    S4 ……
    T No My birthday is on lunar October 12th I hope I can celebrate my birthday with you
    Ss It’s my pleasure
    (板书稍作解释)
    lunar
    2 (日历图片展示节日日期 学生说出日期)
    2011
    9月10日

    2011
    12月25日

    2011
    11月24日
    星期四

    2011
    12月31日
    十二月初七

    2012
    1月23日
    正月初

    2012
    2月6日
    正月十五
    T What’s the date Do you know
    S5 It’s Sept 10th 2011
    S6 It’s Dec 25th 2011
    S7 It’s November 24th Thursday 2011
    S8 It’s December 31st lunar December 7th 2011
    S9 It’s January 23rd lunar January 1st 2012
    S10It’s February 6th lunar January 15th 2012
    (告诉学生日期节日 然请学生说出节日名称)
    T Boys and girls do you know what days these dates are
    Ss Some festivals
    T Yes They are dates of some festivals Please say these festivals
    S11It’s Teachers’ Day
    S12圣诞节
    T Yes It’s Christmas
    S13新年前夜
    T Yes It’s New Year’s Eve
    S14春节
    T Yes It’s Spring Festival
    S15元宵节
    T Yes It’s Lantern Festival Well do you know what day it is on Nov 24th 2011
    (教师指导学生万年历查找出结果学生起说出答案)
    Ss It’s Thursday
    T Yes it’s the fourth Thursday in November It’s Thanksgiving 感恩节
    (教师板书节日名称 领读生词)

    Spring Festival Teachers’ Day
    Christmas New Year’s Eve
    Thanksgiving Lantern Festival
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间8分钟)
    呈现1a 解1a容
    (教学生词:掌握dumpling sweet luck riddle pie理解turkey 解dragon pumpkin播放1a录音学生通听力解节日名称日期特殊食物相关庆祝活动教师黑板课前准备表格请学生关键词完成表格)
    (板书)
    dumpling sweet luck riddle pie turkey dragon pumpkin
    T There are four festivals To celebrate them we eat some special foods and take part in some special activities Please listen to 1a carefully and complete the table
    Festival
    Date
    Food
    Activity
    Spring Festival
    lunar January 1st
    dumplings

    Christmas

    turkey and Christmas cakes
    give each other presents
    Lantern Festival
    lunar January 15th


    Thanksgiving

    turkey and pumpkin pie
    families get together for a big
    dinner to eat turkey and pumpkin pie

    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间12分钟)
    巩固1a 完成1b
    1 (次播放1a录音 学生读 注意新单词读音)
    T Please listen again and follow the tape Pay attention to the pronunciation of the new words
    2 (全班分成4组教师提问采竞争机制 组回答问题 该组优胜组学生节日日期食物相关活动更深记忆完成1b)
    T I will divide you into four groups and ask you some questions about the festivals Try to answer the questions The group which answers the most questions will be the winner
    T When is the Spring Festival
    G1 It’s in January or Februaryon lunar January 1st
    T What food do Chinese people eat on the Spring Festival
    G2 Dumplings
    T How do people celebrate it
    G3 Perform lion and dragon dances
    T …
    G4 …

    (组里学生答问题 教师面表里该组记1分)
    Group
    1
    2
    3
    4
    Point




    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间8分钟)
    练完成2掌握not … until believe full moon理解midnight Easter fool Midautumn mooncake

    1 (播放2录音 学生听容填空格)
    T Please open your books to page 94 listen and fill in the blanks in 2
    2 (核答案 次播放录音 学生读)
    T Please check the answers then listen to the tape again and follow it
    3 (学生补充教学1a时表格)
    T Please continue to complete the table with new contents
    4 (检查学生否记住学节日名称 采取游戏机制 全班分成4组 组第学生说节日名称 学生必须重复前面节日名称 说新节日名称 次类推组短时间说全10节日该组优胜组)
    T Please say the names of festivals Work in four groups The first student says a name The following student must repeat the names that have been said and add a new one The group using the shortest time to say ten names will be the winner
    Group 1
    S1 Spring Festival
    S2 Spring Festival Christmas
    S3 Spring Festival Christmas …

    5 (检查学生否记住节日准确日期教师说日期 学生说出节日名称教师说出节日名称 学生说出日期)
    T When is Teachers’ Day
    Ss On September 10th
    T What festival is it on April 1st
    Ss April Fool’s Day

    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间9分钟)
    通活动学生加深节课学种节日记忆理解
    1 (找朋友教师课前准备干纸条纸条容分四类第类注明节日名称第二类注明节日日期包括农历公历第三类注明节日里食物第四类注明节日里活动)
    活动步骤:1教师准备纸条分放四纸盒里盒外标名称日期食物活动纸盒放讲台
    2教师学生分四组根准备节日数目第组快速度抽取纸条读出节日名称然节日时间序排队(节日选名学参加)
    3第二组学该节日搭配日期
    4第三组学该节日搭配食物
    5第四组学该节日搭配活动
    (活动完成组选出名学朗读表现组获胜组获胜组位成员获教师课前准备适合节日礼物肯定学生成绩学生成感激发学生学英语兴趣培养学生参意识)
    注:活动循环进行























    Unit 8 The Seasons and the Weather
    Topic 3 Let’s celebrate
    Section B
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    important prepare church put up open gift grape
    2 (1)Talk about festivals
    It (Christmas) is on December 25th
    On Christmas Eve the night of December 24th families often go to church and sing Christmas songs
    (2)Talk about customs and culture
    Children put up stockings by the fireplaces or at the end of their beds before they go to bed
    Some Jewish people eat apples with honey for a sweet new year
    3 Express wishes and congratulations
    Merry Christmas Happy New Year
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机日历图片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间5分钟)
    复节日名称巩固关节日容知识
    1 (复节日名称)
    T There are a lot of festivals in the world Can you name them
    Ss Spring Festival Midautumn Festival
    2 (学生说出节日日期全班分4组 采竞争机制 组说 时短组里名学生说出节日 面学生重复前面说教师面表里记录时间)
    Group
    1
    2
    3
    4
    Time




    T I will divide you into four groups Please list the names and dates of the festivals Every student can say only one festival and its date The following students can not repeat the names that have been said The group which says the most festivals in the shortest time will be the winner
    S1 Spring Festival in January or FebruaryS2 April Fool’s Day April 1st

    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间12分钟)
    呈现1a初步解课文
    ××年
    12月25日
    1 (展示幅日历 呈现圣诞节)
    T What’s the date Ss It’s December 25th
    T What festival is it Ss It’s Christmas
    T Yes It’s the most important festival in many countries What do you know about Christmas Ss …
    T Do you like Christmas Ss …
    T Why
    Ss …
    (展示圣诞节相关图片 呈现部分关键词汇)

    (1) (2) (3)
    T I have some beautiful pictures about Christmas Do you want to have a look
    Ss Yes we do
    T OK Let’s look at Picture 1 first It’s a Christmas tree what can you see in the tree
    Ss Lights balls stars…
    T Yes Before Christmas Day people are busy preparing for it They decorate Christmas trees with lights colorful balls stars and so on
    Look at Picture 2 What can you see at the end of the bed
    Ss Stockings presents
    T Yes On Christmas Eve children put up stockings by the fireplaces or at the end of their
    beds before they go to bed They think Santa Claus will fill the stockings with presents so on the morning of Christmas Day children always get up very early and open the stockings
    Look at Picture 3 Families are having a big gettogether with a special dinner
    (板书讲解画线部分生词短语)
    the most important prepare decorate colorful put up stocking fireplace open gettogether
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间10分钟)
    巩固1a 进步理解掌握课文容
    1 (次播放1a录音 学生读 圈出短文中关键词)
    T Please listen to the tape again and follow it Circle the key words
    (分钟 板书关键词)
    important—Dec 25th—preparing—decorate—church—
    stockings—open—give—gettogether—dinner—greet
    2 (学生根关键词分段复述短文)
    T Please try to retell the story with the key words
    S1 Christmas is the most important festival in many countries It is on December 25th…
    S2 On Christmas Eve families often go to church…

    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    练完成1b 2a2b
    1 (完成1b)
    T Work alone please Read the passage in 1a again and complete the table in 1b with √ or ×
    (核答案)
    T Now let’s check the answers
    Christmas activity

    decorate Christmas trees

    play games with apples
    ×
    give neighbors sweets
    ×
    give each other presents

    sing Christmas songs

    put up stockings at the end of their beds

    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间8分钟)
    通活动 拓展思维
    1 (学生呈现食物节日联系起)
    T Boys and girls we all know on different festivals we eat different foods Please tell me when we eat the rest food in 2a and say something about the festival When do we eat sweet dumplings
    Ss On the Lantern Festival People watch lantern shows and guess riddles on lanterns
    T When do people eat turkey
    Ss On Thanksgiving Families get together for a big dinner It’s on the 4th Thursday in November
    T Mooncakes
    Ss On the Midautumn Festival…

    2 (学生补充说出某节日吃什特殊食物)
    T We usually eat mooncakes on the Midautumn Festival What else do we eat
    Ss Youzi nuts…
    T What do people eat for the Spring Festival
    Ss Dumplings oranges…

    3 (学生选择特节日 说明庆祝)
    T There are a lot of festivals Now please choose a special festival And complete the table
    Festival name
    Date
    How to celebrate






    4 (家庭作业)
    (学生图书馆网搜寻更关国家区迎接新年吃食物相关资料 扩视野 增强文化意识)
    T Let’s get to know more about different foods to welcome the new year in different countries or areas You can search on the Internet or in the library
    Ⅳ疑点探究
    春节吃橘子象征年圆圆满满象征吉祥
    Unit 8 The Seasons and the Weather
    Topic 3 Let’s celebrate
    Section C
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    start whole stay up knock onat shout trick or treat
    2 Talk about customs and culture
    People stay up and enjoy dumplings at midnight for good luck
    On the first day of the lunar new year children greet their parents and get lucky money from them
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具
    录音机歌曲磁带图片卡片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间7分钟)
    复节日名称引入春节题
    1 (求学生分说出中国西方节日名称复巩固)
    T Boys and girls we know there are a lot of festivals in the world Some festivals are celebrated in China while some festivals are celebrated in western countries Can you tell me what festivals are celebrated in western countries
    Ss April Fool’s Day Easter Halloween Christmas…
    T What festivals are celebrated in China
    Ss Lantern Festival Midautumn Festival…
    2 (复圣诞节庆祝方式)
    T Christmas is the most important festival in western countries What do people do before Christmas How do people celebrate it
    S1 They give Christmas cards to their friends and decorate Christmas trees
    T What do people do on Christmas Eve
    S2 Go to church and put up stockings
    T What do people do on Christmas
    S3 Children open the presents in the stockings and give gifts to each other
    3 (讨春节前活动 呈现课关春节题)
    T We know Spring Festival is our important festival Please work in groups have a discussion and complete the table
    Before the Spring Festival
    On the Eve
    On the first day
    go shopping

    have a big dinner watch TV

    visit friends

    (学生询问讨结果)
    T What do people do before the Spring Festival
    S4 People go shopping
    S5 …

    (通交流呈现课生词短语)
    (板书讲解生词短语)
    start whole stay up
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间7分钟)
    呈现1a 解课文容
    1 (学生阅读短文 短文中画出描述春节活动句子)
    T Just now we discussed how people celebrate the Spring Festival Now please read the
    passage in 1a and underline the sentences about the main activities of the Spring Festival
    2 (教师课前准备春节活动相匹配图片学生根短文容说出该图片展示项春节活动)

    (请学生教师展示图片写出描述春节活动句子完成1a)
    (图片序次核答案)
    Prepare delicious food
    Clean and decorate their houses
    Get together for a big dinner
    Stay up and enjoy dumplings
    Greet their parents and get lucky money
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间9分钟)
    巩固1a 完成1b
    1 (播放1a录音 学生读)
    T Please listen to 1a and repeat it
    2 (求学生利春节活动复述1a适发挥想象)
    T Now please try to retell the passage with the main activities and something else you know
    S1 Before the Spring Festival …
    S2 …
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间12分钟)
    完成2a 2b
    1 (学生完成2a练)
    T Yesterday was Halloween Julia had a wonderful time with her friends Then she wrote a letter to Kangkang Here are several new words and phrases Let’s learn them
    (板书讲解生词)
    knock onat shout trick or treat
    T Now read the letter and fill in the blanks in 2a
    (学生答案写黑板)
    T Who’d like to write your answers on the blackboard
    was had wore gave didn’t play tell
    (学生观察 判断动词什形式)
    T These words are verbs What form of these verbs do we use
    Ss Simple past form
    T Yes we use the past form of the verbs except the last one
    (学生找出短文中出现动词式)
    T Please find out more verbs in the simple past form in the letter and circle them
    (学生说出找动词式)
    T Please tell us what you have found
    (求学生说出知道动词式)
    T Can you say some more verbs and their past forms that we have learned
    S1 Sing—sang
    S2 Buy—bought

    (总结纳动词式五种变化规律加深学生部分容印象)

    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间 10分钟)

    1 (Yes or No)
    (1)准备教师事先准备四张卡片张卡片写10句子中句子容真实符合事实
    (2)学生分四组
    (3)先第组中选出名学生台抽出张卡片该生读出卡片句子句读两遍组学必须声断位学读句根真实情况分说出YesNo回答正确加分回答错误分该句第二遍读完该组没回答时教师双手击掌三组学生开始抢答第抢答正确者组赢分第句回答完毕接着读第二句第三句第四句……
    (4)组读完10句统计组分分数高组优胜组
    注:①卡片句子容涉话题涉节日
    ②果学生具较高英语水采分组抗形式组学生现场说句子组学生判断正误容涉课没提中国传统节日方特色节日样激发学生求知欲
    (面提供句子供游戏根事实判断句子正误)
    1 The Spring Festival usually comes in January or February
    2 Chinese people usually eat noodles on the Spring Festival
    3 On the Lantern Festival people eat sweet dumplings for long life
    4 People often eat turkey and Christmas cakes on Christmas
    5 Many people eat turkey and pumpkin pie on Thanksgiving
    6 On the Midautumn Festival people eat dumplings and enjoy the bright full moon
    7 Christmas is on December 24th
    8 Some Chinese people eat apples on the Spring Festival They are round like years
    9 In Spain people eat twelve grapes for good luck in the new year
    10 Some Jewish people eat apples with honey for a sweet new year
    2 (家庭作业)
    (学生课搜集区民庆祝春节方式)
    T Please collect some ways to celebrate the Spring Festival in different areas of China


    Unit 8 The Seasons and the Weather
    Topic 3 Let’s celebrate
    Section D
    Ⅰ Aims and demands目标求
    1 Learn some new words and phrases
    International Labor Day Dragon Boat Festival hold race National Day the PRC capital flag burn god
    2 (1)Talk about holidays and festivals
    One of them is International Labor Day that is May Day It’s on May 1st People enjoy a oneday holiday
    The Dragon Boat Festival is on lunar May 5th
    October 1st is the National Day of the PRC
    (2)Talk about customs and culture
    On this day people hold dragon boat races in many places and eat rice dumplings to remember Qu Yuan
    The whole country celebrates the birthday of China on this day
    Before Chinese New Year many Chinese families burn the old picture of Zao Shen the kitchen god to get good luck
    Ⅱ Teaching aids 教具 录音机图片
    Ⅲ Fivefinger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案
    Step 1 Review 第步 复(时间7分钟)
    通唱歌 复节日名称引入1
    1 (复Jingle Bells 组形式竞赛)
    T Can you sing Jingle BellsSs Yes
    T What festival is Jingle Bells forSs Christmas
    T OK Please sing the song in groups I want to see which group sings best
    G1 (唱)Dashing through the snow ……
    T Group X sings best Congratulations
    Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现(时间11分钟)
    通总结话题学节日应庆祝活动呈现41
    1 T We have learned a lot of festivals and activities and we know each festival has a special celebrating activity For example on Thanksgiving people eat turkey and pumpkin pie On Christmas people send Christmas cards Boys and girls please look at 4 and tell us what people do on other festivals
    S1 People enjoy a bright full moon on the Midautumn Festival
    S2 Children knock on their neighbors’ doors and shoutTrick or treaton Halloween
    S3 People eat sweet dumplings for good luck on the Lantern Festival
    S4 People make colorful eggs to celebrate Easter
    S5 Children get lucky money as new year gifts on the first day of the Spring Festival
    S6 Chinese people celebrate the birthday of China on National Day
    People play tricks on others on April Fool’s Day
    People enjoy a oneday holiday on the Dragon Boat Festival
    T OK very good(播放4录音学生读)
    T Listen to 4 and repeat it

    Holiday or festival
    Date
    Activity
    International
    Labor Day
    May 1st
    go shopping or traveling
    Dragon Boat Festival
    lunar May 5th
    hold dragon boat races eat rice dumplings
    to remember Qu Yuan
    National Day
    October 1st
    watch the national flag go up
    Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固(时间7分钟)
    巩固1学会复述节日活动
    1 (播放1录音 学生读)T Listen to 1 and repeat it
    2 (学生根表格容 描述节日)T Please try to describe the holidays or festivals according to the table
    S1 May Day is on May 1st People often go shopping or traveling
    S2 The Dragon Boat Festival is on lunar May 5th People hold dragon boat races and eat rice dumplings
    S3 National Day is on October 1st People watch the national flag go up
    3 (学生谈1中节日活动相关事)
    T Now talk about activities or stories about the festivals mentioned in 1
    S4 We have a oneday holiday on May Day We often go shopping or traveling
    S5 We have a threeday holiday on National Day We enjoy watching the national flag go up
    S6 As Qu Yuan was so loved by people the fishermen in his hometown rushed out in long boats when they heard of his death playing the drums to scare the fish away and throwing Zongzi a kind of rice dumpling into water to feed the fish so that they would not eat Qu Yuan’s body…
    Step 4 Practice 第四步 练(时间10分钟)
    通练 完成2 3
    1 (听2录音完成2根听容图片标正确序号)
    T Boys and girls Here are some beautiful pictures can you tell me what they are about(展示2中图片)
    Ss Yes They are about different festivals
    T Good Please listen to the tape and number the pictures in the right order you hear
    (核答案)T What’s the right orderSs 5—2—3—1—4…
    Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动(时间10分钟)
    通活动 培养学生语言表达力
    1 (学生根5中表格容求全班学中采访完成表格活动中英语)
    T Boys and girls we wrote a lot of compositions about different festivals just now Now let’s make a survey about your classmates’ favourite festivals Suppose you are a journalist please interview your classmates according to the table in 5 Try your best to speak English during the interview Let’s see who can do best within 6 minutes
    2 (家庭作业)(学生根调查结果写篇短文节课选两名学生全班汇报)
    T Write a passage according to the results of your survey Next class I’ll ask two students to report to the class
    文档香网(httpswwwxiangdangnet)户传

    《香当网》用户分享的内容,不代表《香当网》观点或立场,请自行判断内容的真实性和可靠性!
    该内容是文档的文本内容,更好的格式请下载文档

    下载文档到电脑,查找使用更方便

    文档的实际排版效果,会与网站的显示效果略有不同!!

    需要 10 香币 [ 分享文档获得香币 ]

    下载文档

    相关文档

    仁爱版英语七年级下册全册教案(详细)

     20XX-----20XX学年度 第二学期 教学备课本 学科: ______________ 年级:____________...

    5年前   
    6649    1

    外研版七年级英语下册全册教案设计

    外研版英语七年级下册全册教案设计2021-1-27Module 1 Lost and foundUnit l 第1课时自主学习方案 1.学生自学新词汇(见教材P104)。 2.学生自学教...

    3年前   
    760    0

    仁爱版英语七年级上下册(全册)短语汇总

    一、上册: 短语、重要句型汇总 Unit 11、     Good morning/ afternoon / evening    早上...

    2年前   
    552    0

    最新版仁爱版七年级下册英语全册知识点

    最新版仁爱版七年级下册英语全册知识点 Unit 5 Topic 1 重点短语:1. on foot 步行go …on foot = walk ( to )…2. at the school ...

    1年前   
    365    0

    仁爱版七年级下册英语Unit5Topic3SectionB-学案

    (一). 学新单词并能熟练朗读(二) 自学1a 并回答下面问题: (1) What book is Zhou Yan reading?_____________________________...

    2年前   
    378    0

    仁爱版七年级下册英语Unit5Topic2SectionD学案

    1. 自学1a 并回答下面问题:(1) What is Wen Wei doing in Picture 1?_______________________________(2) What ...

    2年前   
    443    0

    Unit8Topic2SectionB学案仁爱版七年级下册英语

    一学习目标:○1学习做假日计划.○2学习怎样提建议(What place should I visit?

    3年前   
    498    0

    仁爱版七年级英语下册Unit8Topic3学案

    知识点一: People have get-togethers and don’t go to bed until after midnight to the new year.人们团聚在一起,...

    2年前   
    315    0

    仁爱版七年级下册英语Unit5Topic2SectionA-学案

    1. 自学1a 并回答下面问题:(1) What is Jane doing? ____________________________________________________ (2...

    2年前   
    339    0

    Unit8Topic2SectionA学案仁爱版七年级下册英语

    一学习目标○1学习want/plan/wish/hope/would like to…的用法。○2学习谈论假日计划.

    3年前   
    584    0

    仁爱版七年级下册英语Unit5Topic3SectionC学案

    (1) What does Hu Bin think of his school life? _____________________________(2) How many classes ...

    2年前   
    361    0

    仁爱版七年级下册英语Unit5Topic2SectionC学案

    1. 自学1a 并回答下面问题: (1) What is Miss Wang doing? _______________________________...

    2年前   
    356    0

    仁爱版七年级下册英语:Unit7Topic3SectionC学案

    学习目标:1, 学习掌握本话题的重点单词与短语。2, 继续学习一般过去式和动词过去式的不规则变化,能够运用一般过去时简单的介绍过生日的情况。3, 培养学习英语时态的感觉,掌握过去时时态的用法。

    2年前   
    386    0

    科普版五年级下册英语全册教案

    科普版英语五年级下册全册教案设计2021-1-29Lesson 1May I speak to Mary?◆ 教学目标【知识目标】1、确保学生认识和理解一些基本单词的意义和简单口头运用,需要掌...

    3年前   
    852    0

    外研版五年级下册英语全册教案

    Module 1题材(主要)内容Lingling和Sam, Amy在英国。Amy和Lingling看到电视节目中记者在采访一位中国老太太。老人在采访中谈到了过去生活的艰苦和现在生活发生的变化。...

    2年前   
    527    0

    外研版三年级英语下册全册教案

    外研版英语三年级下册全册教案设计2021-1-27Module 1Unit 1 It’s the ABC songs.教学目标1.知识技能目标:能听说读写26个英文字母。能正确识别印刷体、手写...

    3年前   
    1175    0

    外研版五年级英语下册全册教案

    外研版英语五年级下册全册教案设计2021-1-27Module 1题材(主要)内容Lingling和Sam, Amy在英国。Amy和Lingling看到电视节目中记者在采访一位中国老太太。老人...

    3年前   
    910    0

    湘少版三年级英语下册全册教案

    Unit 1 How are you?Period 1教学目标能听懂、会说本课会话;能运用“How are you?”进行问候,并对此做出回应;力求在第一课堂就激发学生学习英语的兴趣。二、教...

    4年前   
    721    0

    外研版四年级下册英语全册教案

    Module 1Unit 1 She’s a nice teacher.知识目标: a) 能听、说、认读下列单词: nice、clever、shy、naughty b) 能听懂、会说下...

    2年前   
    536    0

    科普版四年级下册英语全册教案

    科普版英语四年级下册全册教案设计2021-1-29Lesson 1 Whose watch is it? ◆ 教学目标【知识目标】1、学会本课中的四会及三会单词和短语。2、学习并掌握形容词性物...

    3年前   
    1010    0

    文档贡献者

    z***u

    贡献于2020-03-06

    下载需要 10 香币 [香币充值 ]
    亲,您也可以通过 分享原创文档 来获得香币奖励!
    下载文档